Table of Contents
Intellinet 560931 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for 560931 by Intellinet which is a product in the Network Switches category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
16-PORT PoE+
WEB-MANAGED GIGABIT
ETHERNET SWITCH
WITH 2 SFP PORTS
MODEL 560931
INT-560931-UM-10-14-01
!
!
FCC Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy. It may cause harmful interference to radio communications if the equipment is not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CE Warning
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
!
!
!
"!
Content
#$!%&'()*+!,-.&-/.0!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1!
#$#!234'&!23536.7.5+!8.3+)&.9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1!
#$:!%&'()*+!;<.*/=/*3+/'59!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>!
#$"!%3*?36.!@'5+.5+9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:!
#$A!BC!D3&5/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:!
:$!E3&(03&.!F.9*&/<+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"!
"$!%&.<3&3+/'5!='&!23536.7.5+!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#G!
"$#!%&.<3&3+/'5!='&!;.&/3H!@'59'H.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#G!
"$:!%&.<3&3+/'5!='&!D.I!J5+.&=3*.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#K!
"$"!%&.<3&3+/'5!='&!L.H5.+M;;E!J5+.&=3*.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1!
A$!8.3+)&.!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!N!D.I!BJ!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:O!
A$#!;P9+.7!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:O!
A$#$#!;P9+.7!J5='&73+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:O!
A$#$:!J%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:#!
A$#$"!J%-K!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!::!
A$#$A!QL%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"!
A$#$G!;P9+.7!C'6!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A!
A$:!%'0.&!R.()*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:K!
A$:$#!CSF!%'0.&!R.()*+/'5!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:K!
A$:$:!SSS!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T!
A$"!%'&+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:1!
A$A!;.*)&/+P!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"O!
A$A$#!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"O!
A$A$#$#!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!B9.&9!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"O!
A$A$#$:!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!%&/-/H.6.!C.-.H9!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"#!
A$A$#$"!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!V)+U!2.+U'(!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!""!
A$A$#$A!;.*)&/+P!M;0/+*U!M!;;E!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"A!
A$A$#$G!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!ELL%;!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"A!
A$A$#$K!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!V**.99!23536.7.5+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"G!
A$A$#$T!;.*)&/+P!M!;0/+*U!M!;Q2%!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!"T!
A$A$#$1!R2,Q!;+3+/9+/*9!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!AG!
A$A$:!;.*)&/+P!M!Q.+0'&?!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!GO!
A$A$:$#!%'&+!;.*)&/+P!C/7/+!@'5+&'H!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!GO!
A$A$:$:!;.*)&/+P!M!Q.+0'&?!M!Q.+0'&?!V**.99!;.&-.&!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!G"!
A$A$:$"!;.*)&/+P!M!Q.+0'&?!M!V**.99!@'5+&'H!C/9+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!KO!
A$A$:$A!;0/+*U!M!Q.+0'&?!M!FE@%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!TA!
!
!
A!
A$A$:$G!J%!;')&*.!W)3&(!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!TK!
A$A$:$K!VR%!J59<.*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!T1!
A$A$"!;.*)&/+P!M!VVV!V)+U.5+/*3+/'5!;.&-.&!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!T>!
A$G!V66&.63+/'5!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1"!
A$G$#!;+3+/*!V66&.63+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1"!
A$G$:!CV@%!N!FP537/*!V66&.63+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1A!
A$K!C''<!%&'+.*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1K!
A$T!;<355/56!L&..!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1T!
A$T$#!;<355/56!L&..!M!X&/(6.!;.++/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1T!
A$T$:!;<355/56!L&..!M!2;LJ!23<</56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!1>!
A$T$"!;<355/56!L&..!M!2;LJ!%&/'&/+/.9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>#!
A$T$A!;<355/56!L&..!M!@J;L!%'&+9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>:!
A$T$G!;<355/56!L&..!2;LJ!%'&+9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>A!
A$1!2YR!Z2)H+/*39+!YCVQ!R.6/9+&3+/'5[!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>K!
A$>!J%2@!ZJ%!2)H+/*39+[!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>T!
A$>$#!JW2%!;5''</56!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>T!
A$>$#$#!X39/*!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>T!
A$>$#$:!JW2%!;5''</56!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!>>!
A$>$#$"!JW2%!;5''</56!M!%'&+!W&')<!8/H+.&/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#O#!
A$>$:!2CF!;5''</56!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#O:!
A$>$:$#!X39/*!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#O:!
A$>$:$:!2CF!;5''</56!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#O"!
A$>$:$"!J%2@!M!2CF!;5''</56!M!%'&+!W&')<!8/H+.&/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#OG!
A$#O!CCF%!%3&37.+.&9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#OK!
A$#O$#!CCF%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#OK!
A$#O$:!CCF%!2.(/3!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#O1!
A$##!%'S!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!##G!
A$#:!2V@!V((&.99!L3IH.!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!##1!
A$#"!YCVQ!ZY/&+)3H!CVQ[!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:#!
A$#"$#!YCVQ!2.7I.&9U/<!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:#!
A$#"$:!YCVQ!%'&+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:"!
A$#A!%&/-3+.!YCVQ9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:G!
A$#A$#!%&/-3+.!YCVQ!2.7I.&9U/<!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:G!
A$#A$:!%'&+!J9'H3+/'5!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:K!
A$#G!Y@C!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:1!
A$#G$#!Y@C!M!2V@NX39.(!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:1!
A$#G$:!Y@C!M!%&'+'*'HNI39.(!YCVQ!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#:>!
A$#G$"!Y@C!M!J%!;)I5.+NI39.(!YCVQ!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"#!
!
!
G!
A$#K!Y'/*.!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#""!
A$#K$#!Y'/*.!YCVQ!M!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#""!
A$#K$:!Y'/*.!YCVQ!M!,BJ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"G!
A$#T!\';!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"K!
A$#T$#!\';!M!J56&.99!%'&+!@H399/=/*3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"K!
A$#T$:!\';!M!J56&.99!%'&+!%'H/*.&!@'5=/6!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"T!
A$#T$"!\';!M!%'&+!;*U.()H.&!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#"1!
A$#T$A!\';!M!S6&.99!%'&+!;U3<.&9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#">!
A$#T$G!\';!M!%'&+!L36!R.73&?/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#AO!
A$#T$K!\';!M!%'&+!F;@%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#A#!
A$#T$T!\';!M!F;@%!I39.(!\';!J56&.99!@H399/=/*3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#A:!
A$#T$1!\';!M!F;@%!L&359H3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#AA!
A$#T$>!\';!M!F;@%!@H399/=/*3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#AG!
A$#T$#O!\';!M!@'5+&'H!C/9+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#AK!
A$#T$##!\';!M!;+'&7!@'5+&'H!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#A1!
A$#1!2/&&'&/56!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#GO!
A$#>!B%5%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#G:!
A$:O!98H'0!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#G"!
G$!8.3+)&.!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!N!@CJ!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#GG!
G$#!;P9+.7!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#GG!
G$:!%'0.&!R.()*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#G>!
G$"!%'&+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#KO!
G$A!;.*)&/+P!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#K#!
G$G!V66&.63+/'5!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#T:!
G$K!C''<!%&'+.*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#T"!
G$T!;<355/56!L&..!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#TA!
G$1!2YR!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#TK!
G$>!J%2@!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#TT!
G$#O!CCF%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#T1!
G$##!%'0.&!'-.&!S+U.&5.+!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#T>!
G$#:! ! 2V@!V((&.99!L3IH.!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1O!
G$#"! ! YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1#!
G$#A! ! %&/-3+.!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1#!
G$#G! ! Y@C!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1:!
G$#K! ! Y'/*.!YCVQ!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1"!
G$#T! ! \';!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1A!
G$#1! ! 2/&&'&/56!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1K!
G$#>!B%5%!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1T!
!
!
K!
G$:O! ! 98H'0!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1T!
G$:#! ! F/365'9+/*!@'7735(9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#11!
G$::! ! 23/5+.535*.!@'7735(9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#1>!
K$!D.I!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!N!2'5/+'&]!F/365'9+/*]!23/5+.535*.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>#!
K$#!2'5/+'&!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>#!
K$#$#!2'5/+'&!M!;P9+.7!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>#!
K$#$#$#!2'5/+'&!M!;P9+.7!M!J5='&73+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>#!
K$#$#$:!@%B!C'3(!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>:!
K$#$#$"!;P9+.7!C'6!J5='&73+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>:!
K$#$#$A!;P9+.7!M!F.+3/H.(!C'6!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>A!
K$#$:!2'5/+'&!M!%'&+!;+3+.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>A!
K$#$:$#!%'&+!;+3+.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>A!
K$#$:$:!L&3==/*!,-.&-/.0!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>G!
K$#$:$"!\';!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>K!
K$#$:$A!\@C!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>T!
K$#$:$G!F.+3/H.(!%'&+!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!#>>!
K$#$!"!2'5/+'&!M!;.*)&/+P!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:O"!
K$#$"$#!;.*)&/+P!M!V**.99!23536.7.5+!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:O"!
K$#$"$:!;.*)&/+P!M!Q.+0'&?!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:OA!
K$#$"$"!;.*)&/+P!M!VVV!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!::"!
K$#$"$A!;0/+*U!M!;Q2%!M!R2,Q!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"O!
K$#$A!CV@%!;P9+.7!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"K!
K$#$A$#!;P9+.7!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"K!
K$#$A$:!CV@%!%'&+!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"T!
K$#$A$"!CV@%!9+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:"1!
K$#$G!C''<!%&'+.*+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:">!
K$#$K!;L%!X&/(6.!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:AO!
K$#$K$#!X&/(6.!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:AO!
K$#$K$:!;L%!%'&+!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A#!
K$#$K$"!;L%!%'&+!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A:!
K$#$T!2YR!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A"!
K$#$T$#!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A"!
K$#$T$:!2YR!W&')<!L3IH.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:AA!
K$#$1!2'5/+'&!M!J%2@!M!JW2%!;5''</56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:AG!
K$#$1$#!JW2%!;5''</56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:AG!
K$#$1$:!2CF!;5''</56!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:A>!
K$#$>!2'5/+'&!M!CCF%!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:G"!
K$#$>$#!CCF%!M!Q./6UI'&!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:G"!
!
!
T!
K$#$>$:!CCF%!2SF!Q./6UI'&9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:GG!
K$#$>$"!CCF%!%'S!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:G>!
K$#$>$A!CCF%!SSS!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:KO!
K$#$>$G!CCF%!;+3+/9+/*9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:K"!
K$#$#O!FP537/*!2V@!L3IH.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:KG!
K$#$##!YCVQ!2.7I.&9U/<!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:KK!
K$#$#"!Y@C!2V@NX39.(!YCVQ!;+3+)9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T#!
K$#$#A!98H'0!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T:!
K$:!F/365'9+/*!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T"!
K$:$#!%/56!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T"!
K$:$:!%/56K!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:TA!
K$:$"!Y.&/%E^!@3IH.!F/365'9+/*!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:TG!
K$"!23/5+.535*.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:TT!
K$"$#!R.9+3&+!F.-/*.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:TT!
K$"$:!83*+'&P!F.=3)H+9!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:TT!
K$"$"!;'=+03&.!B<H'3(!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T1!
K$"$"$#!8/&703&.!B<(3+.!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T1!
K$"$"$:!J736.!;.H.*+!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:T1!
K$"$A!@'5=/6)&3+/'5!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:1O!
R.-/9/'5!E/9+'&P!$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$!:1#!
!
!
!
1!
1. Product Overview
This is a Layer 2 full-management Gigabit PoE switch, featuring 16 10/100/1000M RJ45 ports
plus 2 Gigabit SFP open slots. The Ethernet ports support IEEE 802.3at PoE, and each port
supports up to 30W. The SFP open slots are available for different types of SFP transceivers to
extend the transmission distance up to 100 kilometers. Including rackmount brackets, the 19"
size fits into your rack environment.
This switch’s embedded and powerful Layer 2 software engine supports Web Management,
SNMP, IPv4/v6, IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, Private VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Voice VLAN, QoS with up
to 4 priority queues, up to 13 Link Aggregation groups, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol,
IGMPv4/v6 IP Multicast Forwarding and Filtering, MVR, Bandwidth Control, Loop Protection,
LLDP, PoE Configuration and abundant security features such as IEEE 802.1X, AAA, IP
Source Guard, Port Security and Access Management. With these advanced L2 management
features, the switches are ideal for the medium or large network environment to strengthen its
network connection.
1.1 Major Management Features
8/16/24 10/100/1000Base RJ45 plus 2 1000Base SFP
8/16/24 10/100/1000Base RJ45 are all built with PoE functionality
Up to 20/36/52Gbps switching capacity, 8K MAC Address Table
Each port supports up to 30W per IEEE 802.3af/at
Per-Port Power Management Feature supports Enable/Disable, Priority Setting,
Overloading Protection and Power Level settings
IEEE 802.1D STP and IEEE 802.1w RSTP
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, up to 4K VLAN Group
Port-Based VLAN, MAC-Based VLAN, Protocol-Based VLAN, MVRP and QinQ
IEEE 802.2ad LACP, Static Trunk support up to 13 trunks, up to 16 ports per trunk
IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3 and Querier port
Up to 9K Jumbo Frame
Rate Control and Storm Control for Broadcast/Multicast/Unknown Unicast
QoS supports up to 8 priority queues per port, 802.1p/IP Precedence, IP ToS, IP DSCP,
DiffServ, the queue scheduling supports WRR, Strict Priority and Hybrid
Advanced Security supports IEEE 802.1x, RADIUS, TACAS+, IP/MAC Filter
Support Command Line, Web Management, SNMP V1/V2c/V3, RMON, Secured
Management supports HTTPS, SSL and SSHv2
sFlow, NTP, LLDP, Port Mirroring, Cable Diagnostic, UPnP
IPv6 Features
Note: Refer to the website datasheet for details and product specifications.
!
!
>!
1.2 Product Specifications
Hardware Specification
Interface
Total Ports
10
18
26
10/100/1000 Mbps
8
16
24
Gigabit SFP
2
2
2
Autonegotiation and Auto-MDIX
Yes
Yes
Yes
Flow Control
Backpressure for half duplex,
802.3x for full duplex
Console (RS-232)
Yes
LEDs
System (State / Color)
Y
Port (State: Link/Act / Color)
Y
PoE (State: On / Color)
Y
System
CPU
416MHz
Flash
16MB
SDRAM
128MB
Packet Buffer
4Mb
Switching Capacity
20/36/52Gbps non-blocking
Forwarding Architecture
Store and forward
Package Forwarding Rate
14.8/26.8/38.7Mpps (@ 64bytes)
MAC Address Table
8K
Jumbo Frames
9K
PSE Ports
Port Volume
8
16
24
PoE Capability
30W (802.3at)
Total PSE Power
120/230/500W (Current Share)
Power through RJ45 pins
Pair 1,2 / 3,6
Power Requirement
/ Consumption
AC Input
100-240V AC, 50/60Hz
Consumption - not including PSE
10W
17W
25W
Environmental
Operating Temperature / ˚C
0-40
Relative Humidity while operating
5-90% (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature / ˚C
-20 – 80
Relative Humidity at storage
5-90% (non-condensing)
Mechanical
Dimensions mm (HxWxD)
44x330x210
44x330x210
44x440x331
Weight
2.45 kg
2.45 kg
3.0 kg
Compliance
CE, FCC Part 15 Class A
Yes
Software Specifications
!
!
#O!
Standards
IEEE 802.3 - 10Base-T
IEEE 802.3u - 100Base-TX
IEEE 802.3ab - 1000Base-T
IEEE 802.3z - 1000Base-SX/LX
IEEE 802.3x - Flow Control
IEEE 802.1Q - VLAN
IEEE 802.1p - Class of Service
IEEE 802.1D - Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1w - Rapid Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1s - Multiple Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.3ad - Link Agregation Control Protocol (LACP)
IEEE802.1v - Protocol VLAN
IEEE 802.1AB - LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
IEEE 802.1X - Access Control
IEEE 802.3at - Power over Ethernet
IEEE 802.3af - Power over Ethernet
Port Configuration
Link State, Speed/Duplex, Auto-Nego, Flow Control
Rate Control/Limit
VLAN
Port based and 802.1Q Tag-based VLAN
Maximum 4K VLAN Group, 4096 VLANs ID
QinQ
Private VLAN
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
MAC based VLAN
IP Subnet-based VLAN
IEEE802.1v Protocol VLAN
Voice VLAN
QoS
4 Physical priority queues
Scheduling - WRR, Strict, WRR+SP
CoS: Port-based, 802.1p, DSCP, TCP/UDP Port-based
Storm Control (Broadcast, Multicast, unknown Unicast)
Link Agreggation
Static and 802.3ad LACP
Static Trtunk
Hash Algorithm Type (DA, SA, DA+SA MAC-based, SIP...)
Loop Protection
Protect the unexpected network loop by shutdown port
Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1D - Legacy Spanning Tree
IEEE 802.1w - Rapid Spanning Tree
!
!
##!
IEEE 802.1s - Multiple Spanning Tree
BPDU Guard, BPDU Filtering
Multicast
IGMP Snooping v1/v2/v3, MLD(IPv6) Snooping v1/v2
Maximum 8K Multicast Groups
IGMP/MLD Querier, Router Port, Proxy, Immediate Leave
Traffic Mirroring
Port Mirror (1 to 1, 1 to N, N to 1)
sFlow
MAC Address Table
Dynamic MAC address management
Static MAC address
Security
Port Security (MAC-Port,
IP-MAC-Port Binding)
802.1x authentication (Port based,
MAC address based)
User Name Password
Authentication by Local/RADIUS…
Up to 15 User Privilege Levels
Access Management by IP
IP Source Guard
RADIUS
TACACS+
Guest VLAN
DoS Defense
SSHv1/SSHv2
SSLv2/SSLv3/TLSv1
Access Control List (L2/L3/L4)
Management
Web GUI Management, CLI (Console/Telnet/SSH)
DHCP Client, Snooping, Relay/Option 82, BOOTP
SNMP V1/V2c/V3, Trap, RMON
Firmware upgrades by TFTP/HTTP
Configurration Backup/Reload
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) by lPv4/v6 types
System Log for events, warnings and information
NTP
Maintenance
VeriPHY Diagnostic
IPv4/V6 Ping Diagnostics
!
!
#:!
CPU Monitor
PoE Specifications
Per port POE State Enable/Disable
Maximum system/port PoE power setting
Port power priority setting
PD Status monitoring
1.3 Package Contents
Before you start to install this switch, verify that the packaging contains the following items:
- One Network Switch
- One Power Cord
- One User Manual on CD
- One Rackmount Kit + 8 Screws
1.4 UL Warning
If using this switch in conjunction with the similar 8-port (+ 2 SFPs) model, note that that
model is designed for building installations and is not intended to be connected to exposed
(outside plant) networks (including campus environments), and the ITE is to be connected
only to PoE networks without routing to the outside plant.
!
!
2. Hardware Description
This section mainly describes the hardware of the switch and gives a physical and functional
overview of it.
Front!Panel!
The front panel of the switch consists of 16 (Model 560931) 10/100/1000 Base-TX RJ45
ports and 2 Gigabit uplink SFP ports. The LED Indicators are also located on the front panel.
LED Indicators
The LED Indicators present real-time information of systematic operation status. The
following table is an example (24-port model) of the LEDs’ status and their meaning.
LED
Color / Status
Description
No. of LEDs
Power
Amber On
Power on
Power
10/100/1000M
Green On
Link Up
1-24
Green Blinking
Data Activating
PoE
Amber On
PD is connected
1-24
SFP
Green On
linked to Power Device
25-26
Green Blinking
Data Activating
25-26
Rear!Panel!
The 3-pronged power plug is on the rear panel of the switch.
RJ-45
LED
SFP
RJ-45
Console
LED
SFP
Console
!
!
#A!
Hardware!Installation!
The switch is usually mounted in a 19” rack, which is usually installed in an IT room or other
secure place. The switch supports AC power input, PoE delivery and rackmount mounting.
Make sure all the power cables, Ethernet cables, screws and the air circulation are well
prepared and installed as directed below.
AC Power Input
Connect the attached power cord to the AC power input connector. The compatible AC
power input range is from 100 to 264 VAC.
Ethernet cable Request
Wiring cable types:.
10 Base-T: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 3, 4, 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
100 Base-TX: 2-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
1000 Base-T: 4-pair UTP/STP Cat. 5 cable, EIA/TIA-568 100-ohm (Max. 100m)
PoE: To deliver power without problems, Cat 5e or Cat 6 cable is suggested, as high-quality
Ethernet cable reduces the loss of power during transmission.
SFP Installation
When installing an SFP transceiver, make sure the SFP type at each end is the same and
the transmission distance, wavelength and fiber cable can meet your demands. It is
recommended that the SFP transceiver be purchased with the switch to avoid any
incompatibility issues.
When connecting, plug the SFP fiber transceiver in first. The SFP transceiver has 2 plugs for
fiber cable: one is TX (transmit), the other is RX (receive). Cross-connect the transmit
channel at each end to the receive channel at the opposite end.
Rackmount Installation
Attach the brackets to the device by using the screws provided in the Rackmount Kit.
Mount the device in the 19‟ rack by using four rackmounting screws provided by the rack
manufacturer.
!
!
3. Preparation for Management
The switch provides both in-band and out-band configuration methods.
Out-band Management: You can configure the switch using RS232 console cable if you
don’t attach your admin PC to your network, or if you lose the network connection to your
switch. It wouldn’t be affected by network performance. This is so-called out-band
management.
In-Band Management: You can remotely manage the switch via a Web browser, such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla, to configure and operate the switch from anywhere on
the network.
The following topics are covered in this chapter:
3.1 Preparation for Serial Console
3.2 Preparation for Web Interface
3.1 Preparation for Serial Console
In the package, there is one R232 console cable. Attach one end of the console cable to
your PC COM port, the other end to the console port of the switch.
1. Go to Start → Program → Accessories → Communication → Hyper Terminal
2. Give a name to the new console connection.
3. Choose the COM name.
4. Select correct serial settings. The serial settings of the switch are as below:
Baud Rate: 115200 / Parity: None / Data Bit: 8 / Stop Bit: 1
5. After connecting, you can see Switch login request.
6. Log in to the switch. The default username is “admin”; the password, “admin.”
Figure 3-1 Hyper Terminal Console Screen
Note: The Win 7 or later OS version doesn't provide the Console Terminal tool, but you can
search for and download the tool: Hyper Terminal from the Microsoft website or other
terminal tools, such as PuTTY for a console connection.
!
!
#K!
Figure 3-2 PuTTY Configuration
Figure 3-3 PuTTY Login Screen
3.2 Preparation for Web Interface
The Web Management page allows you to use a standard Web browser — such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer, Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox — to configure the switch
from anywhere on the network.
Before you attempt to use the Web user interface to manage switch operation, verify that
your switch is properly installed on your network and that every PC on this network can
access the switch via the Web browser.
1. Verify that your network interface card (NIC) is operational, and that your operating
system supports the TCP/IP protocol.
2. Connect the switch to a power source and connect your computer to the switch.
3. The switch default IP address is 192.168.2.1. The switch and the connected PC should be
located within the same IP subnet.
!
!
#T!
4. Change your computer's IP address to 192.168.2.XX or another IP address that is located
in the 192.168.2.x subnet (for example: IP Address: 192.168.2.30; Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0).
Launch the Web browser and log in.
5. Launch the Web browser (Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox) on the PC.
6. Type “http://192.168.2.1” (or the IP address of the switch). And then press Enter.
7. The login screen will appear next.
8. Key in the password. Default user name and password are both “admin.”
If you can't log in to the switch, the following steps can help you to identify the problem.
1. Switch to DOS command mode and type "ipconfig" to check the NIC's setting. Type "ping
192.168.2.1" to verify a normal response time.
2. Check the security and firewall settings of your computer.
3. Try a different Web browser.
!
!
3.3 Preparation for Telnet/SSH Interface
If your Window OS is Win XP, Win 2000 or an earlier version, you can access the Telnet
console by default command. If your OS is Window 7 or a later version, download a terminal
tool, such as HyperTeminal or PuTTY.
The switch supports both Telnet and SSH consoles. The SSH console can be treated as a
secured Telnet connection, but you need to enable the SSH feature in "Security / Switch /
SSH."
Traditional Telnet Connection
1. Go to Start → Run → cmd. And then press Enter.
2. Type “Telnet 192.168.2.1” (or the IP address of the switch). And then press Enter.
Access Telnet or SSH by Terminal tool PuTTY.
1. Open Telnet/SSH Client/PuTTY
In the Session configuration, choose Telnet/SSH in the Protocol field.
In the Session configuration, enter the Host Name (IP Address of your switch) and Port number
(default Telnet =23, SSH = 22).
Then click Open to start the SSH session console.
2. After you click Open, you can see the cipher information in the popup screen. Press Yes to
accept the Security Alert.
If you choose the Telnet connection, there is no such cipher information and window. It goes
directly to the next step.
!
!
#>!
3. After few seconds, the Telnet/SSH connection is established, the login page of Telnet/SSH
is the same as console. The command line of Telnet, SSH and console are all the same.
!
!
4. Feature Configuration - Web UI
The switch provides abundant software features. After you log in to the switch, you can start
configuring the settings or monitoring the status. There is a question mark at the top right of
the screen that you can click to get help from the system.
Following are Web UI configuration guides for your reference.
4.1 System Configuration
4.1.1 System Information
This page shows the system information and allows you to configure the new settings.
System Contact
The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together with information on how
to contact this person.
System Name
An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is the node's fully qualified
domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Z, a-z), digits (0-9) and minus
sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha
character, and the first or last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is up to 255.
System Location
The physical location of this node (e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed string length is up to 255,
and the allowed content is 32 to 126 ASCII characters.
Time zone Offset
Provide the time zone offset relative to UTC/GMT. The offset is given in minutes east of GMT. The valid
range is from -720 to 720 minutes.
!
!
:#!
Buttons:
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.1.2 IP Configuration:
Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page.
The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration.
The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration.
DHCP Client
Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero, DHCP
will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non-zero, DHCP will stop and the configured IP
settings will be used. The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to
provide DNS lookup.
IP Address
Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
IP Mask
Provide the IP mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation.
IP Router
Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.
NTP Server
Provide the IP address of the NTP Server in dotted decimal notation.
DNS Server
Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.
!
!
::!
VLAN ID
Provide the managed VLAND ID. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.
DNS Proxy
When DNS proxy is enabled, the switch will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on
the switch, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Renew: Click to renew DHCP. This button is only available if DHCP is enabled.
4.1.3 IPv6 Configuration
Configure the switch-managed IPv6 information on this page:
The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration.
The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration.
Auto Configuration
Enable IPv6 auto-configuration by checking this box. If it fails, the configured IPv6 address is zero. The
router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds. The total time needed to complete
auto-configuration can be significantly longer.
Address
Provide the IPv6 address of this switch. The IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight
fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
“fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7.” The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of
representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It can also
represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, “::192.1.2.34.”
Prefix
Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch. The allowed range is 1 to 128.
Router
!
!
:"!
Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch. The IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as
eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
“fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7.”
The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit
groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4
address. For example, “::192.1.2.34.”
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Renew: Click to renew IPv6 AUTOCONF. This button is only available if IPv6 AUTOCONF is enabled.
4.1.4 NTP Configuration:
NTP is short for Network Time Protocol. Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize time
clocks on the Internet. You can configurethe NTP Server’s IP address here to synchronize the clocks of
the remote time server on the network.
This page indicates the NTP mode operation:
Mode
Possible modes:
Enable NTP mode operation. When NTP mode operation is enabled, the agent forwards NTP messages
between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain.
Disable NTP mode operation.
Server #
Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. The IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented
as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
“fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7.” The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of
!
!
:A!
representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It can also represent
a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, “::192.1.2.34.”
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.1.5 System Log Configuration:
System Log is useful to allow the system administrator to monitor the switch’s events history.
The switch supports syslog server mode. You can install the syslog server in one computer,
then configure the server address and event types in the switch's system log configuration.
When the events occur, the switch will send information or warning messages to the syslog
server. The administrator can analysyze the system logs recorded in the syslog server to find
out the cause of the issues.
The switch Web UI allows you to Enable the Syslog Server, assign the IP address and assign
the syslog level.
Server Mode
Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog message will send
out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514
and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless
protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments. The syslog packet will always send out even if the
syslog server does not exist. Possible modes:
Enable server mode operation.
Disable server mode operation.
Server Address
Indicates the IPv4 host address of the syslog server. If the switch provides a DNS feature, it also can be a
host name.
Syslog Level
Indicates what kind of message will be sent to the syslog server. Possible modes:
Info: Send information, warnings and errors.
Warning: Send warnings and errors.
Error: Send errors.
!
!
:G!
!
!
4.2 Power Reduction
4.2.1 LED Power Reduction Configuration
LED!Intensity!
LED power consumption can be reduced by lowering the LED intensity. LED intensity could, for example,
be lowered during nighttime, or they could be turned completely off. It is possible to configure LED
intensity for each hour of the day.
Time
The time at which the LED intensity shall be set. The time settings are in hourly increments.
Intensity
The LED intensity (100% = Full power, 0% = LED off)
Maintenance Time
As a network administrator doing maintenance on the
switch (e.g., adding or moving users), you may want to
have full LED intensity during the maintenance period.
Therefore, it is possible to specify that the LEDs shall use
full intensity during a specific period of time.
Maintenance Time is the number of seconds that the
LEDs will have full intensity after either a port has
changed link state or the LED push button has been
pressed.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.2.2 EEE Configuration
This page allows you to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings:
EEE is a power-saving option that reduces the power
usage when there is very low traffic utilization (or no
traffic).
EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no
traffic. When a port gets data to be transmitted, all
circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the
circuits is called wakeup time. The default wakeup time is
17 microsecs. for 1Gbit links and 30 microsecs. for other
link speeds. EEE devices must agree upon the value of
the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the
receiving and transmitting devices have all circuits
powered up when traffic is transmitted. The devices can
exchange information about wakeup time using the
LLDP protocol.
For maximizing the power saving, the circuit isn't started
at soon as transmit data is ready for a port, but is instead
queued until 3000 bytes of data is ready to be sent. To
avoid a long delay in case that data is less than 3000
bytes, data is always transmitted after 48 microsecs.,
giving a maximum latency of 48 microsecs. + the wakeup
time.
If desired, you can minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue
(done with QOS), and then marking the queue as an urgent queue. When an urgent queue gets data to
be transmitted, the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time.
Port
The switch port number of the logical EEE port.
EEE Enabled
Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port.
EEE Urgent Queues
Queues set will activate transmision of frames as soon as any data is available. Otherwise, the queue will
postpone the transmsion until 3000 bytes is ready to be transmitted.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.3 Port Configuration:
This page displays current port configurations and link status. Some of the ports settings can also be
configured here.
Port
This is the port number for this row.
Link
The current link state is displayed graphically.
Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down.
Current Link Speed
Provides the current link speed of the port.
Ex: 1Gfdx. 1G indicates the Gigabit speed, fdx indicates full duplex mode.
Configured Link Speed
Select any available link speed for the selected switch port.
Auto Speed: Selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner.
Disabled: Disables the switch port operation.
Fiber Speed
Configure the speed for a fiber port.
Note: Port speed for the copper ports will automatically be set to Auto when dual media is selected.
Disabled: Disables SFPs (copper port only).
SFP-Auto: Automatically determines the speed at the SFP.
Note: There is no standardized way to do SFP auto detect, so here it is done by reading the SFP rom. As
a result, some SFPs might not be detectable.
!
!
:>!
1000-X force SFP speed to 1000-X.
100-FX force SFP speed to 100-FX.
Flow Control
When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised
to the link partner.
When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used. The Current Rx column indicates whether
pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the
port are transmitted. The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.
Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link
Speed.
Maximum Frame Size
Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS.
The switch supports up to 9K Jumbo Frames.
Excessive Collision Mode
Configure port transmit collision behavior.
Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).
Restart: Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions.
Power Control
The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port. The Configured
column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port.
Disabled: All power savings mechanisms are disabled.
ActiPHY: Link down power savings enabled.
PerfectReach: Link up power savings enabled.
Enabled: Both link up and link down power savings enabled.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.
!
!
4.4 Security Configuration:
The Security Configuration feature has three subsections: Switch, Network and AAA.
4.4.1 Security / Switch
The switch settings include User Database, Privilege Levels, Authentication Method, SSH, HTTPs, Access
Management, SNMP and RMON setting.
4.4.1.1 Security / Switch / Users Configuration
This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently, the only
way to log in as another user on the Web server is to close and reopen
the browser.
This page configures a user: This is also a link to
Add User & Edit User.
Add New User/Edit User
Click "Add New User", and the configuration page goes to "Add User" screen. You can see the User
Setting table. Follow the below instructions to fill the table.
Click the created User Name, and the page goes to "Edit User" screen. You can change the settings on it.
User Name
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32.
The valid user name is a combination of letters, numbers and underscores.
Password
The password of the user. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Privilege Level
The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15.
If the privilege level value is 15, it can access all groups; i.e., granted full control of the device. But other
values need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than the
group privilege level to have the access to that group.
By default, most groups’ privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the
read-write access. And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults, etc.) need user
privilege level 15. Generally, privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege level 10
for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.
Check the next chapter to see how to configure privilege levels.
Buttons
Add new user: Click to add a new user.
!
!
"#!
4.4.1.2 Security / Switch / Privilege Level Configuration:
This page provides an overview of the privilege levels.
!
!
":!
Group Name
The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of a single
module (e.g., LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them contain more than one.
The following description defines these privilege level groups in details:
System: Contact, Name, Location, Time zone, Log.
Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC based and the
MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection and IP source guard.
IP: Everything except “ping.”
Port: Everything except “VeriPHY.”
Diagnostics: “ping” and '”VeriPHY.”
Maintenance: CLI-System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password, Configuration Save,
Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web-Users, Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance.
Debug: Only present in CLI.
Privilege Levels
Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following subgroups: configuration read-only,
configuration/execute read-write, status/statistics read-only, status/statistics read-write (e.g., for clearing
statistics).
User Privilege should be the same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to
that group.
Insufficient Privilege Level: If you log in with a lower-level privilege and try to access the higher
privilege level configuration feature, the message Insufficient Privilege Level will appear. If you want to
continue, be sure that you have the privilege.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
""!
4.4.1.3 Security / Switch / Auth. Method
This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs in to the switch via one of the
management client interfaces.
The table has one row for each client type and a number of columns:
Client
The management client for which the configuration below applies.
Authentication Method
Authentication Method can be set to one of the following
values:
none: Authentication is disabled and login is not possible.
local: Use the local user database on the switch for
authentication.
RADIUS: Use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.
TACACS+ : Use a remote TACACS server for
authentication.
Fallback
Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box.
If none of the configured authentication servers are alive, the local user database is used for
authentication.
This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than “none” or “local.”
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
"A!
4.4.1.4 Security / Switch / SSH Configuration
With SSH, you can remotely connect to the switch by command line interface (CLI). The SSH connection
can secure all the configuration commands you sent to the switch. It is also known as secured Telnet
console.
To access the switch by SSH, you should install an SSH client on you computer, such as the PuTTy
console tool. On the switch side, the switch acts as an SSH server for user login, and you can enable or
disable SSH on this page.
Check the Chapter 3.3 Preparation for Telnet/SSH connection to see how to manage the switch through
SSH console.
Mode
Indicates the SSH mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable SSH mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SSH mode operation.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.1.5 Security / Switch / HTTPS Configuration
The Web management page also provides secured management HTTPS login. All the configuration
commands will be secured and will be hard for hackers to sniff the login password and configuration
commands.
This page allows you to configure HTTPS mode.
Mode
Indicates the HTTPS mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS mode operation.
!
!
"G!
Automatic Redirect
Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation. Automatically redirects the Web browser to HTTPS when
HTTPS mode is enabled. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Disabled: Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.4.1.6 Security / Switch / Access Management Configuration
The Access Management mode allows you to limit the switch access with a specific range of IP
addresses and disable some remote management services, such HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, Telnet and SSH.
This feature is important as you install the switch on a network. After enabling Access Management, only
the preconfigured IP address or a range of IP addresses can access the switch management interface,
and only the available service can be accessed.
Configure the access management table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. If the
application's type matches any one of the access management entries, it will allow access to the switch.
In the example below, only the IP addresses from 192.168.2.101 to 192.168.2.200 can access the
switch's management interface. The available services are HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, Telnet and SSH. If an
IP address such as 192.168.2.201 is used to try to open the web management interface, it is not allowed.
Mode
Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.
Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Start IP address
Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.
End IP address
Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.
With the Start and End IP address, you can assign a range of IP addresses.
!
!
"K!
HTTP / HTTPS
Indicates that the host can access the switch from the HTTP / HTTPS interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
SNMP
Indicates that the host can access the switch from the SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the
IP address range provided in the entry.
TELNET / SSH
Indicates that the host can access the switch from the TELNET / SSH interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
Buttons
Add New Entry: Click to add a new group entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
"T!
4.4.1.7 Security / Switch / SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used for exchanging management
information between network devices. The switch supports SNMP and equips lots of OIDs for remote
management. All the OIDs are unique and correspond to one feature/command.
The switch can support SNMP V1, V2c and V3. The following commands show how to configure SNMP
and its related parameters.
Mode
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.
Version
Indicates the SNMP-supported version. Possible versions:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP-supported version 1.
SNMPv2c: Set SNMP-supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP-supported version 3.
Read Community
Indicates the community read-access string to permit access to the SNMP agent. The allowed string
length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when the SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If the SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with the SNMPv3 communities table. It provides more
flexibility to configure a security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In addition to
community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict the source subnet.
Write Community
Indicates the community write-access string to permit access to the SNMP agent. The allowed string
length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when the SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If the SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with the SNMPv3 communities table. It provides more
flexibility to configure a security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string. In addition to
community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict the source subnet.
Engine ID
Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with
the number of digits between 10 and 64 — but all zeros and all Fs are not allowed. Changes in the Engine
ID will clear all original local users.
!
!
"1!
SNMP Trap Configuration
Configure SNMP trap on this page.
Trap Mode
Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
Trap Version
Indicates the SNMP trap-supported version. Possible versions:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP trap-supported version 1.
SNMPv2c: Set SNMP trap-supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP trap-supported version 3.
Trap Community
Indicates the community access string when sending an SNMP trap packet. The allowed string length is 0
to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Trap Destination Address
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address.
Trap Destination IPv6 Address
Provide the trap destination IPv6 address of this switch. The IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For
example, “fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7: The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand
way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can only appear once. It can also
represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, “::192.1.2.34.”
Trap Authentication Failure
Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps. Possible modes:
Enabled: SNMP trap authentication failure.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.
Trap Link-up and Link-down
Indicates the SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap link-up and link-down mode operation.
!
!
">!
Trap Inform Mode
Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds)
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.
Trap Inform Retry Times
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.
Trap Probe Security Engine ID
Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values:
Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.
Trap Security Engine ID
Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for
authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When "Trap Probe
Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field
is used. The string must contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between
10 and 64, but all zeros and all Fs are not allowed.
Trap Security Name
Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and
privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
SNMPv3!Community!Configuration!
You can configure the SNMPv3 community table on this page:
The entry index key is Community.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
!
!
AO!
Community
Indicates the community access string to permit access to the SNMPv3 agent. The allowed string length
is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126. The community string will be
treated as a security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string.
Source IP
Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can be used to
restrict the source subnet when combined with a source mask.
Source Mask
Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.
Buttons
Add new community: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
SNMPv3!User!Configuration!
Configure the SNMPv3 user table on this page. The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Engine ID
An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must contain an even
number (in hexadecimal format) with the number of digits between 10 and 64, but all zeros and all Fs are
not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based Security Model (USM) for message security
and the View-based Access Control Model (VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the usm User
Engine ID and usm User Name are the entry's keys. In a simple agent, the usm User Engine ID is always
that agent's own snmp Engine ID value. The value can also take the value of the snmp Engine ID of a
remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if the user engine ID equals
the system engine ID, then it is local user; otherwise, it's a remote user.
User Name
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
!
!
A#!
Security Level
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means it must first be ensured
that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Protocol
Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible authentication protocols:
None: No authentication protocol.
MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.
SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.
The value of the security level cannot be modified if an entry already exists. That means you must first
ensure that the value is set correctly.
Authentication Password
A string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol, the allowed
string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed
content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Privacy Protocol
Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocols:
None: No privacy protocol.
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol.
Privacy Password
A string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32, and the allowed
content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Add new user: Click to add a new user entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
A:!
!
SNMPv3!Group!Configuration
!
Configure the SNMPv3 group table on this page:
The entry index keys are Security Mode and Security Name.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Security Model
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models:
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Name
A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Group Name
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Add new group: Click to add a new group entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
A"!
!
SNMPv3!View!Configuration!
!
Configure the SNMPv3 view table on this page.
The entry index keys are View Name and OID Sub-tree.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
View Name
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
View Type
Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view types:
Included: An optional flag to indicate that this view sub-tree should be included.
Excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view sub-tree should be excluded.
In general, if a view entry's view type is “excluded,” there should be another view entry existing with view
type as “included,” and its OID sub-tree should overstep the “excluded” view entry.
OID Subtree
The OID defining the root of the sub-tree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length is 1 to 128.
The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk (*).
Buttons
Add new view: Click to add a new view entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
AA!
SNMPv3!Access!Configuration!
Configure the SNMPv3 access table on this page. The entry index keys are Group Name, Security Model
and Security Level.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Group Name
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string length is 1 to 32,
and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Security Model
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models:
Any: Any security model accepted(v1|v2c|usm).
V1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
V2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
Usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
Security Level : Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to.
Possible security models:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
Read View Name
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Write View Name
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values.
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons
Add new access: Click to add a new access entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
AG!
!
!
4.4.1.8 RMON Statistics Configuration
RMON is short for Remote Monitoring On Network. An RMON implementation typically operates in a
client/server model. The monitoring device (probe) contains RMON software agents that collect
information of the system and ports. The RMON software agent acts as a server, and the network
management system (NMS) that communicate with it acts as a client. The RMON agent of the switch
supports four groups: Statistics, History, Alarm and Event.
RMON Group
Function
Elements
Statistics
Contains statistics measured
by the probe for each
monitored interface on this
device.
Real-time LAN statistics; e.g.,
utilization, collisions, CRC errors
Packets dropped, packets sent, bytes
sent (octets), broadcast packets,
multicast packets, CRC errors, undersize
packets, oversize packets, fragments,
jabbers, collisions and counters for
packets ranging from 64, 65 to 127, 128
to 255, 256 to 511, 512 to 1023, and 1024
to 1518 bytes.
History
Records periodic statistical
samples from a network and
stores for retrieval.
History of above Statistics.
Alarm
Definitions for RMON SNMP
traps to be sent when statistics
exceed defined thresholds.
Interval for sampling, particular variable,
sample type, value of statistics during the
last sampling period, startup alarm, rising
threshold, rising index, falling threshold,
falling index.
Events
Controls the generation and
notification of events from this
device.
Event index, log index, event log time,
event description.
The NMS can get the above information through remote polling. The information from the switch can be
collected, analyzed and displayed as a table, graphic, etc.
RMON!Statistics!Configuration!
Configure the RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
!
!
AK!
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID to be monitored. If in a stacked switch, the value must add 1000* (switch ID-1); for
example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
RMON!History!Configuration!
Configure the RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Data Source
Indicates the port ID to be monitored. If in a stacked switch, the value must add 1000* (switch ID-1); for
example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1 to 3600; the
default value is 1800 seconds.
Buckets
Indicates the maximum data entries associated with this History entry stored in RMON. The range is from
1 to 3600; the default value is 50.
Buckets Granted
The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.
!
!
AT!
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
RMON!Alarm!Configuration!
Configure the RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold. The range is
from 1 to 65535.
Variable
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled. The possible variables:
InOctets: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
InUcastPkts: The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InDiscards: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even when the packets are normal.
InErrors: The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to
a higher-layer protocol.
InUnknownProtos: The number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of unknown or
unsupported protocols.
OutOctets: The number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
OutUcastPkts: The number of unicast packets that request to transmit.
OutNUcastPkts: The number of broadcast and multicast packets that request to transmit.
OutDiscards: The number of outbound packets that are discarded even when the packets are normal.
OutErrors: The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.
OutQlen: The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
!
!
A1!
Sample Type
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the
thresholds. Possible sample types:
Absolute: Get the sample directly.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).
Value
The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.
Startup Alarm
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the
thresholds. Possible sample types:
Rising: Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.
Falling: Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.
RisingOrFalling: Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the
falling threshold (default).
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value (-2147483648 – 2147483647).
Rising Index
Rising event index (1 – 65535).
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value (-2147483648 – 2147483647)
Falling Index
Falling event index (1 – 65535).
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
A>!
RMON!Event!Configuration!
Configure the RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
ID
Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.
Desc
Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127; the default is a null string.
Type
Indicates the notification of events. Possible types:
None: The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
Log: The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Snmptrap: The number of broadcast and multicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Logandtrap: The number of inbound packets that are discarded even when the packets are normal.
community
Specify the community when a trap is sent. The string length is from 0 to 127, the default is "public."
Event Last Time
Indicates the value of sysUp Time at the time this event entry last generated an event.
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new community entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
GO!
4.4.2 Security /Network
4.4.2.1 Port Security Limit Control Configuration
This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings.
Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port. A user is identified by a MAC address
and VLAN ID. If Limit Control is enabled on a port, the limit specifies the maximum number of users on
the port. If this number is exceeded, an action is taken. The action can be one of the four different actions
as described below.
The Limit Control module utilizes a lower-layer module, Port Security module, which manages MAC
addresses learned on the port.
The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections: systemwide and portwide.
!
!
G#!
System Configuration
Mode
Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, other modules
may still use the underlying functionality, but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled.
Aging Enabled
If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period.
Aging Period
If Aging Period is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other modules are using
the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may have other requirements to the aging
period. The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the
functionality.
The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.
To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an end-host is
connected to a third-party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit
Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that
the end-host logs off or powers down. If it weren't for aging, the end-host would still take up resources on
this switch and would be allowed to forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging
enabled, a timer is started once the end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts
looking for frames from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the
end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed up on the switch.
Port!Configuration!
The table allows you to configure the Port Configuration parameters:
Port
The port number to which the configuration below applies.
Mode
Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must be set to
Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port
security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.
Limit
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number cannot exceed
1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new
MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may
happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used all
available MAC addresses.
Action
If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:
None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.
Trap: If Limit+ 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If Aging is disabled, only one
SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets
exceeded.
!
!
G:!
Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This implies that all
secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new address will be learned. Even if the
link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port (by disconnecting the cable), the port will
remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open the port:
1) Boot the switch
2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch
3) Click the Reopen button
Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the "Trap" and the "Shutdown"
actions described above will be taken.
State
This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of view. The state
takes one of four values:
Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.
Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.
Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be shown if Action is
set to None or Trap.
Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state can only be shown
if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.
Re-open Button
If a port is shut down by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button, which will only be enabled
if this is the case. For other methods, refer to Shutdown in the Action section.
Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed, so non-committed changes will be
lost.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
G"!
!
4.4.2.2 Security / Network / Network Access Server Configuration
This page allows you to configure the IEEE802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port
settings.
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized
access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. One or more central
servers, the backend servers, determine whether the user is allowed access to the network. These
backend (RADIUS) servers are configured on the "Configuration→Security→AAA" page. The
IEEE802.1X standard defines port-based operation, but non-standard variants overcome security
limitations as shall be explored below.
MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't
require the user to have special 802.1X supplicant software installed on his system. The switch uses the
user's MAC address to authenticate against the backend server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC
addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less secure than 802.1X authentication.
The NAS configuration consists of two sections: systemwide and portwide.
!
!
GA!
System!Configuration!
Mode
Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed
forwarding of frames.
Reauthentication Enabled
If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified
by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used to detect if a new
device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached.
For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed. It
does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a
client is still present on a port (see Aging Period below).
Reauthentication Period
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated. This is only
active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600
seconds.
EAPOL Timeout
Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.
Aging Period
This setting applies to the following modes; i.e., modes using the Port Security functionality to secure
MAC addresses:
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port Security
module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources
if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This parameter controls exactly this period and can be
set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802.1X-based mode, this is not so critical, since
supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication, which
will fail. But if reauthentication is not enabled, the only way to free resources is by aging the entries.
For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct communication between the
switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not, and the only way to
free any resources is to age the entry.
Hold Time
This setting applies to the following modes; i.e., modes using the Port Security functionality to secure
MAC addresses:
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-Based Auth.
If a client is denied access — either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the
RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the "Configuration→Security→
AAA" page) — the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state. The hold timer does not count during an
ongoing authentication.
In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time.
The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
!
!
GG!
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled
RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from
a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The RADIUS server must be
configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature (see RADIUS-
Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable
RADIUS server-assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting
determine whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-
server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports.
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled
RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully
authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the
RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes
to take advantage of this feature (see RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable
RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determine
whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled on that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned
VLAN is disabled on all ports.
Guest VLAN Enabled
A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN — typically with limited network access — on which 802.1X-unaware
clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The switch follows a set of rules for
entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest VLAN
functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved
into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports.
Guest VLAN ID
This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It is only
changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range 1-4095.
Max. Reauth. Count
The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before
considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The value can only be changed if the
Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range 1-255.
Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen
The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the port. Once
the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check if this option is enabled or
disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame
has not been received on the port for the lifetime of the port. If enabled (checked), the switch will consider
entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the lifetime of the
port.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
!
!
GK!
Port!Configuration!
The table has a number of columns that allow you to configure the port mode based on the IEEE 802.1X
standard. Select the port and configure the settings.
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Admin State
If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode. The following modes are
available:
Force!Authorized!
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up, and any client
on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.
Force!Unauthorized!
In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up, and any client
on the port will be disallowed network access.
PortNbased!802.1X!
In the 802.1X world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS
server is the authentication server. The authenticator acts as the man in the middle, forwarding requests
and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server. Frames sent between the
supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames.
EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS
server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes
like the switch's IP address, name and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in
that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-CHALLENGE, PEAP and TLS. The important
thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know which authentication method the
supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information exchange frames are
needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the
relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or
failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block
traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant.
Note: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds
(using the AAA configuration page), and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down (but not
considered dead). Now, if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds,
then it will never get authenticated, because the switch will cancel ongoing backend authentication server
requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant. And since the server hasn't
yet failed (because the X seconds haven't expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next
backend authentication server request from the switch. This scenario will loop forever. Therefore, the
server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.
Single!802.1X!
In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port, the whole
port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected to the port (for instance, through a
hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they
really aren't authenticated. To overcome this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant.
Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics as does
port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time.
!
!
GT!
Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch. If more
than one supplicant is connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's link comes up will be
the first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time,
another supplicant will get a chance. Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated, only that supplicant
will be allowed access. This is the most secure of all the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security
module is used to secure a supplicant's MAC address once successfully authenticated.
Multi!802.1X!
Multi 802.1X is — like Single 802.1X — not an IEEE standard, but a variant that features many of the
same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at
the same time. Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port
Security module.
In Multi 802.1X, it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as a destination MAC address
for EAPOL frames sent from the switch toward the supplicant, since that would cause all supplicants
attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch. Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's
MAC address, which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by
the supplicant. An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends
EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any
supplicants that might be on the port.
The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security
Limit Control functionality.
MAC-based Auth.
Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices
method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch
acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame (any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped
by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and password in the
subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on
the following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased
hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS
server must be configured accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn
causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using the Port-Security module. Only
then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this
authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based authentication is that the clients don't
need special supplicant software to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be
spoofed by malicious users — equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by
anyone. Also, only the MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can be
attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) on a given port, the switch
reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS
server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, traffic received on the
supplicant's port will be classified to the given QoS Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS
Access-Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no
longer present on the port, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class (which
may be changed by the administrator in the meantime without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes; that is:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X0
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:
The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an
Access-Accept packet.
Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be valid, it must follow
!
!
G1!
this rule:
• All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0-3,
which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0-3.
RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the
switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet transmitted by the
RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN
ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will
be forced into VLAN unaware mode. Once assigned, all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and
switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.
If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it's invalid,
or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's VLAN ID is immediately reverted to
the original VLAN ID (which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the
RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes; that is:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
For troubleshooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership and VLAN Port"
pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN
configuration.
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:
RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access-
Accept packet. The following criteria are used:
• The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type and Tunnel-Private-Group-IDattributes must all be present at
least once in the Access-Accept packet.
• The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfill the following
requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does not need to include a Tag):
- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).
- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).
- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0-9, which is interpreted
as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading 0s are discarded. The final value must be in the
range 1-4095.
Guest VLAN Enabled
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the switch considers
moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes; that is:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
For troubleshooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership and VLAN Port"
pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the current Port VLAN
configuration.
Guest VLAN Operation:
When a Guest VLAN-enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity
frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max,. Reauth., Count and no EAPOL
frames have been received in the meantime, the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN. The interval
between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If “Allow
Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen” is enabled, the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the
switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this
history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will
be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise, it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continue transmitting
EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on the port are
!
!
G>!
allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the
Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such frame is
received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the
supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, the port will never be able to go
back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen" is disabled.
Port State
The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:
Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.
Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.
Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized.
Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant is not
successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.
X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are authorized and Y are
unauthorized.
Restart
Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally
enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.
Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.
Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet-period of the port runs out
(EAPOL-based authentication).For MAC-based authentication, reauthentication will be attempted
immediately.
The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients
to get temporarily unauthorized.
Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately.
The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
KO!
4.4.2.3 Security / Network / Access Control List Configuration
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received
on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Policy ID
Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 0 through 255. The default value is 0.
!
!
K#!
Action
Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is "Permit."
Rate Limiter ID
Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16.
The default value is "Disabled."
Disabled Port Copy
Select which port frames are copied on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. The
default value is "Disabled."
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled."
Logging
Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.
Disabled : Frames received on the port are not logged.
The default value is "Disabled." Note that the System Log memory size and logging rate are limited.
Shutdown
Specify the port shut-down operation of this port. The allowed values:
Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.
The default value is "Disabled."
Counter
Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.
Clear: Click to clear the counter.
!
!
!
K:!
!
ACL Rate Limiters Configuration
Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.
Rate Limiter ID
The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.
Rate
The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps.
Or 0,100,200,300,…,1000000 in kbps.
Unit
Specify the rate unit. The allowed values:
pps: packets per second.
kbps: kbits per second.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
K"!
!
Access Control List Configuration
This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch.
Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch.
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol,
cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority is highest.
Ingress Port
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values:
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Policy / Bitmask
Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.
Frame Type
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type-based ACE will not get
matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Action
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit:: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed,
the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Copy
!
!
KA!
Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number.
The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When Disabled is displayed, the port copy
operation is disabled.
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror
port. The allowed values:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled."
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
Modification Buttons
You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:
: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.
: Edits the ACE row.
: Moves the ACE up the list.
: Moves the ACE down the list.
: Deletes the ACE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs at regular
intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page. Note that non-committed changes will be lost.
Clear: Click to clear the counter
Remove All: Click to remove all ACEs
!
!
KG!
ACE!Configuration!
Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on this page.
An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type that you
select. First select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter
options are displayed depending on the frame type selected.
A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here.
Ingress Port
Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.
All: The ACE applies to all ports.
Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port. You can select
one port or select multiple ports for the entry.
Policy Filter
Specify the policy number filter for this ACE. The policy ID should be the same when you want apply it to
the ACL or Port.
Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field for entering an
policy value and bitmask appears.
Policy Value
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The allowed range is
0 to 255.
Policy Bitmask
When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask. The allowed range
is 0x0 to 0xff.
Select the switch to which this ACE applies. This parameter is reserved to the Stacking model. If the
switch doesn't support stacking, the parameter will not display here.
Any: The ACE applies to any port.
Switch n: The ACE applies to this switch number, where n is the number of the switch.
Frame Type
Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.
!
!
KK!
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes the value of
Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal to 0600 hexadecimal).
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE with ethernet
type.
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE with ethernet
type.
IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE with ehternet
type.
Action
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
Rate Limiter
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabled indicates that the
rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Copy
Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here. The allowed range is the same as
the switch port number range. Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled.
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror
port. The allowed values are:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
Logging
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values:
Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.
Note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.
Shutdown
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values:
Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
MAC Parameters
SMAC Filter
(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)
Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field for
!
!
KT!
entering an SMAC value appears.
SMAC Value
When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address. The legal
format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.
DMAC Filter
Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care.")
MC: Frame must be multicast.
BC: Frame must be broadcast.
UC: Frame must be unicast.
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose this value. A field
for entering a DMAC value appears.
DMAC Value
When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC address. The
legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.
VLAN Parameters
802.1Q Tagged
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed values:
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Enabled: Tagged frame only.
Disabled: Untagged frame only.
The default value is "Any".
VLAN ID Filter
Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care.")
Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field for entering a
VLAN ID number appears.
VLAN ID
When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID number. The allowed
range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value.
Tag Priority
Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority. The allowed
number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care.")
!
!
K1!
ARP Parameters
The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.
ARP/RARP
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care.")
ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.
RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.
Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
Request/Reply
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care.")
Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.
Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.
Sender IP Filter
Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care.")
Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.
Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP
Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
Sender IP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP address in
dotted decimal notation.
Sender IP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted
decimal notation.
Target IP Filter
Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.
Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care.")
Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that
appears.
Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target
IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.
Target IP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP address in
dotted decimal notation.
Target IP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted
decimal notation.
ARP SMAC Match
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field (SHA) settings.
!
!
K>!
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
RARP DMAC Match
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field (THA) settings.
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the DMAC address.
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the DMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP/Ethernet Length
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address length (HLN)
and protocol address length (PLN) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet (0x06) or the (PLN) is not equal to IPv4
(0x04).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4 (0x04).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address space (HRD)
settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet (1).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address space (PRO)
settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP (0x800).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Parameters
The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.
IP Protocol Filter
Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.
Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value. A field for
entering an IP protocol filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will
appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear.
These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear.
These fields are explained later in this help file.
IP Protocol Value
When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The allowed range is
0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.
IP TTL
Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.
!
!
TO!
zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.
non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Fragment
Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More Fragments (MF)
bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.
No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able
to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to
match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Option
Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.
No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
SIP Filter
Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears.
Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP
Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.
SIP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP address in
dotted decimal notation.
SIP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal
notation.
DIP Filter
Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)
Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that
appears.
Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and destination IP
mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.
DIP Address
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP address in
dotted decimal notation.
DIP Mask
When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted
decimal notation.
!
!
T#!
ICMP Parameters
ICMP Type Filter
Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP value. A
field for entering an ICMP value appears.
ICMP Type Value
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value. The allowed range is
0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.
ICMP Code Filter
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP code
value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.
ICMP Code Value
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.
TCP/UDP Parameters
TCP/UDP Source Filter
Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
TCP/UDP Source No.
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source
value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Source Range
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range
value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.
TCP/UDP Destination Filter
Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.
!
!
T:!
TCP/UDP Destination Number
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP
destination value.
TCP/UDP Destination Range
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this
TCP/UDP destination value.
TCP FIN
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP SYN
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP RST
Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP PSH
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP ACK
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
TCP URG
Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet Type Parameters
The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is
selected.
!
!
T"!
EtherType Filter
Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.
Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific EtherType
value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.
Ethernet Type Value
When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType value. The
allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6). A frame
that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Cancel: Return to the previous page.
!
!
TA!
!
4.4.2.4 Switch / Network / DHCP Configuration
DHCP!Snooping!Configuration! !
Configure DHCP Snooping on this page.
Snooping Mode
Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled,
the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted
ports.
Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.
Port Mode
Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes:
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
TG!
!
DHCP!Relay!Configuration!
Configure DHCP Relay on this page.
Relay Mode
Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled, the agent
forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the
same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast message won't be flooded for security considerations.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.
Relay Server
Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address. A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer
DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain.
Relay Information Mode
Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. The option 82 circuit ID format as
"[vlan_id][module_id][port_no]". The first four characters represent the VLAN ID, the fifth and sixth
characters are the module ID (in stand-alone device it always equal 0, in a stackable device it means
switch ID), and the last two characters are the port number. For example, "00030108" means the DHCP
message received from VLAN ID 3, switch ID 1, port No 8. And the option 82 remote ID value is equal to
the switch MAC address.
Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When DHCP relay information
mode operation is enabled, the agent inserts specific information (option 82) into a DHCP
message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when
transferring to DHCP client. It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
Relay Information Policy
Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When DHCP relay information mode operation is
enabled, if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce
the policy. And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled. Possible
policies:
Replace: Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is
received.
Keep: Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received.
Drop: Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received.
!
!
!
TK!
4.4.2.5 IP Source Guard Configuration
IP!Source!Guard!Configuration!
This page provides IP Source Guard-related configuration.
Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration
Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured ACEs will be
lost when the mode is enabled.
Port Mode Configuration
Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a
given port are enabled is IP Source Guard enabled on this given port.
Max Dynamic Clients
Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port. This value can be 0, 1,
2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0, it means the
switch will only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Translate dynamic to static: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
!
!
!
!
!
!
TT!
Static!IP!Source!Guard!Table!
!
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID for the settings.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address.
MAC address
Allowed Source MAC address.
Adding new entry
Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP address and
IP Mask for the new entry. Click "Save."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
!
!
!
T1!
!
4.4.2.6 ARP Inspection
ARP!Inspection!
This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration.
Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration
Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.
Port Mode Configuration
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a
given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Translate dynamic to static: Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.
!
!
!
T>!
Static!ARP!Inspection!Table!
!
!
!
!
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.!
Port
The logical port for the settings.
VLAND ID
The VLAN ID for the settings.
MAC Address
Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.
IP Address
Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.
Adding new entry
Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, MAC address, and
IP address for the new entry. Click "Save."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
1O!
!
4.4.3 Security / AAA Authentication Server Configuration
This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers.
Common!Server!Configuration!
These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers.
Timeout
The Timeout, which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds, is the maximum time to wait
for a reply from a server. If the server does not reply within this timeframe, we will consider it to be dead
and continue with the next enabled server (if any).
RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol, which is unreliable by design. In order to cope with lost
frames, the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length. If a reply is not received within
the subinterval, the request is transmitted again. This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried
up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead.
Dead Time
The Dead Time, which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds, is the period during which
the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request. This will
stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead.
Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if more than one
server has been configured.
!
!
1#!
RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns:
#
The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box.
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server. The IP address is expressed in dotted
decimal notation.
Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the default port
(1812) is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server.
Secret
The secret — up to 29 characters long — shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the
switch.
RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns, which are:
#
The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box.
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server. IP address is expressed in dotted decimal
notation.
Port
The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the default port (1813)
is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server.
Secret
The secret — up to 29 characters long — shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch.
!
!
1:!
TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration
The table has one row for each TACACS+ Authentication Server and a number of columns:
#
The TACACS+ Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Enable the TACACS+ Authentication Server by checking this box.
IP Address/Hostname
The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ Authentication Server. The IP address is expressed in
dotted decimal notation.
Port
The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ Authentication Server. If the port is set to 0 (zero), the default port
(49) is used on the TACACS+ Authentication Server.
Secret
The secret — up to 29 characters long — shared between the TACACS+ Authentication Server and the
switch.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.5 Aggregation Configuration
Link Aggregation is also known as Port Trunking. It allows user using multiple ports in parallel to
increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher
availability. The switch support both Static and Dynamic link aggregation, LACP. The switch
also supports different Hash mechanisms to forward traffic according to the MAC address or IP,
Protocol Port Number.
4.5.1 Static Aggregation
This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group.
The aggregation hash mode settings are global, whereas the aggregation group relates to the
currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Hash Code Contributors
Source MAC Address
The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the
use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.
Destination MAC Address
The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable
the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is
disabled.
IP Address
The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable the use of the
IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
!
!
1A!
TCP/UDP Port Number
The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable
the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is
enabled.
Aggregation Group Configuration
Group ID
Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal" indicates there is no
aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.
Port Members
Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation, or
clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any
aggregation group. Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in
each group.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.5.2 LACP - Dynamic Aggregation
This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change them, as
well.
!
!
1G!
Port
The switch port number.
LACP Enabled
Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when two or more
ports are connected to the same partner. LACP can form up to 12 LLAGs per switch and two GLAGs per
stack.
Key
The Key value incurred by the port (range: 1-65535). The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by
the physical link speed: 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value
can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports
with different keys cannot.
Role
The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each second, while
Passive will wait for an LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to, as it were).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.6 Loop Protection
This page allows you to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and possibly change
them, as well. The loop protection feature is very important to protect the unexpected network
loop, especially when you install the switch on the Internet. Incorrect installation, media failure
or hacker attacks may create network loop.
The switch supports the Loop Protection feature. The port can be shut down or log the
information per your configuration when the switch does detect the network loop.
General Settings
Enable Loop Protection
Controls whether loop protection is enabled (as a whole).
Transmission Time
The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. Valid values are 1 to 10 seconds.
Shutdown Time
The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event a loop is detected (and the port
action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds (7 days). A value of zero will keep a
port disabled (until next device restart).
!
!
1T!
Port Configuration
Port
The switch port number of the port.
Enable
Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port.
Action
Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. The valid values:
Shutdown Port: Shuts down the port until the Shutdown Time timeout.
Shutdown Port and Log: Shuts down the port and log the status.
Log Only: Only log the status.
Tx Mode
Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDUs, or whether it is just passively
looking for looped PDUs.
Button
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.7 Spanning Tree
The switch supports Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) and Legacy Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
The STP and RSTP are combined and defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004, Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol. The RSTP protocol is applied to single network domain no matter how many VLANs
are in your network. In the RSTP domain, one of the switches acts as the Root Switch and
blocks the link with highest path cost to avoid network loops. There are a maximum of 23 level
switches within one RSTP domain. The network size may be limited.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a direct extension of RSTP. It can provide an
independent spanning tree for different VLANs. With the Spanning Tree and VLAN mapping,
each VLAN has its own root and blocking path. As the STP region size becomes lower, the
convergence time of topology change becomes faster, as well.
Here are some common abbreviations you may want to note:
Common Spanning Tree (CST): Common Spanning Tree (CST) interconnects all adjacent
MST regions and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in
the global network.
Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST): MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments
with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). The CIST is formed as a result of the
running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP, RSTP, MSTP
protocols.
MSTI: Multiple Spanning Tree Instance: One VLAN can be mapped to an MSTI. Each
instance has its own root switch, forwarding path, blocking path and table. An MST Region may
contain multiple MSTI.
4.7.1 Spanning Tree / Bridge Setting
This page allows you to configure STP system settings. The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances
in the switch.
!
!
1>!
Basic Settings
Protocol Version
The STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP and MSTP.
Bridge Priority
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have higher priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI
instance number, concatenated (linked) with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch, forms a Bridge
Identifier.
For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this is the priority of the STP/RSTP bridge.
Forward Delay
The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in STP
compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds.
Max Age
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge. Valid values are
in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must be <= (FwdDelay-1)*2.
Maximum Hop Count
This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an
MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to. Valid
values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.
Transmit Hold Count
The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of the next
BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.
Advanced Settings
This section describes the advanced settings of the Spanning Tree Protocol.
Edge Port BPDU Filtering
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.
Edge Port BPDU Guard
Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU. The port
will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active topology.
!
!
>O!
Port Error Recovery
Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time. If
recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for normal STP operation. The condition
is also cleared by a system reboot.
Port Error Recovery Timeout
The time to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are between 30 and
86400 seconds (24 hours).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.7.2 Spanning Tree / MSTI Mapping
This page allows you to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly
change them, as well.
Configuration Identification
Configuration Name
The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and revision (see below),
as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTIs
(Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.
!
!
>#!
Configuration Revision
The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0 and 65535.
MSTI Mapping
MSTI
The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs not
explicitly mapped.
VLANs Mapped
The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be separated with a comma and/or space. A
VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused MSTI should just be left empty (I.e., not having any
VLANs mapped to it).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.7.3 Spanning Tree / MSTI Priorities
This page allows you to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations, and possibly
change them, as well.
!
!
>:!
MSTI
The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.
Priority
Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI
instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.7.4 Spanning Tree / CIST Ports
This page allows you to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations, and possibly change them, as
well.
This page contains settings for physical and aggregated ports.
The STP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
!
!
>"!
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
STP Enabled
Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port.
Path Cost
Controls the path cost incurred by the port.
The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D
recommended values.
Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing
the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher
path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See
above.)
operEdge (state flag)
Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices. (No Bridges attached.)
Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports (having operEdge true) than for other ports.The
value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields. This flag is displayed as Edge in
Monitor->Spanning Tree -> STP Detailed Bridge Status.
Admin Edge
Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state when a port
is initialized.)
Auto Edge
Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port. This allows
operEdge to be derived from whether BPDUs are received on the port or not.
Restricted Role
If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if it has the best
spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been
selected. If set, it can cause a lack of spanning tree connectivity. It can be set by a network administrator
to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network from influencing the spanning tree active
topology, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator. This feature is
also known as Root Guard.
!
!
>A!
Restricted TCN
If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes
to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree's active
topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information. It is set by a network
administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that
region, possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical
link state of the attached LANs transits frequently.
BPDU Guard
If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDUs. Contrary to the similar bridge
setting, the port Edge status does not effect this setting.
A port entering error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting
as well.
Point2Point
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than to a shared medium. This can be
automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to the forwarding state is faster for
point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.7.5 Spanning Tree MSTI Ports
STP MSTI Port Configuration
This page allows you to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations, and possibly change
them, as well.
An MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated (represented) separately for each active CIST (physical)
port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port. The MSTI instance must be selected
before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options.
!
!
>G!
This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports.
Apart from the selected MSTI, the STP MSTI port settings also relate to the currently selected stack unit,
as reflected by the page header.
Port
The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.
Path Cost
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the
physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined
value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower
path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the
range 1 to 200000000.
Priority
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost. (See
above.)
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.8 MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
MVR is short for Multicast VLAN Registration. The MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 networks that enables
multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with client/subscriber VLANs. MVR is typically used for
IPTV-like service. In a non-MVR environment, the IPTV source to different VLANs would make multiple
copies based on how many client/subscriber VLANs it would deliver.
The IPTV actually delivers the same source with multiple IP streams, and the duplicated traffic occupies
the bandwidth of the uplink port. Once the traffic becomes heavy, some unexpected lost or lag appears.
However, after MVR is enabled, the client/subscriber VLANs are registered to the same source VLAN, and
then only one source stream will be delivered to the registered VLANs.
This page provides MVR-related configurations.
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected
stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN. In a multicast television
application, a PC or a television with a set-top box can receive the multicast stream. Multiple set-top boxes
or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port.
When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to
join the appropriate multicast. Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast
VLAN are called MVR source ports.
!
!
>T!
MVR Mode
Enable/Disable the Global MVR.
VLAN ID
Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.
Mode
Enable MVR on the port.
Type
Specify the MVR port type on the port.
Immediate Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.9 IPMC (IP Multicast)
IPMC is short for IP Multicast, in which the switch supports IPv4 and IPv6 multicast
forwarding and filtering. IGMP Snooping defines how to manage IPv4 multicast traffic; MLD
defines how to manage IPv6 multicast traffic.
4.9.1 IGMP Snooping Configuration
Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping (IGMP Snooping) is a multicast constraining mechanism
that runs on Layer 2 devices to manage and control multicast groups. By listening to and analyzing IGMP
messages, a Layer 2 device running IGMP Snooping establishes mappings between ports and multicast
MAC addresses and forwards multicast data based on these mappings.
4.9.1.1 Basic Configuration
This page provides IGMP Snooping-related configuration.
!
!
>1!
Global Configuration
Snooping Enabled
Enable Global IGMP Snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled
Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding. Unregistered IPMCv4 traffic is so-called unknown multicast.
After selected, the unregistered multicast stream will be forwarded like normal packets. Once you
un-selected it, such streams will be discarded.
IGMP SSM Range
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service
model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enabled
Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to
the router side.
Proxy Enabled
Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages
to the router side.
Port Related Configuration
Router Port
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads toward the
Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. Normally, the router port is the uplink port to the upper L3 Router
or IGMP Querier. For example, in below figure, the green ports of the 2 switches are Router ports.
!
!
>>!
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port.
Fast Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the
forwarding-table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface
is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message.
Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network, even
when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously. This processing applies to IGMP and MLD.
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.9.1.2 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration
Navigating the IGMP Snooping VLAN Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table (the default being 20) selected through the "entries
per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of
the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the button
will update the displayed table starting from that or the next-closest VLAN Table match.
The last entry of the currently displayed entry is used as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached, "No more entries" appears in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
!
!
#OO!
IGMP Snooping VLAN Table Columns
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
IGMP Snooping Enabled
Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected.
IGMP Querier
Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN.
Compatibility
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of
IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. Allowed selections are IGMP-Auto, Forced
IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2 and Forced IGMPv3. The default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.
RV
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network.
The allowed range is 1 to 255. The default robustness variable value is 2.
QI
Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier. The
allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds. The default query interval is 125 seconds.
QRI
Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the
periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds. The default query
response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI (LMQI for IGMP)
Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last
Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in
tenths of seconds. The default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
URI
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's
initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds. The default unsolicited
report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
!
!
#O#!
Refresh : Refreshes the displayed table starting from the “VLAN” input fields.
<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest VLAN
ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
Save: To save the configuration.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.9.1.3 IGMP Snooping / Port Group Filtering
IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration
!
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
Filtering Groups
The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered.
Adding New Filtering Group
Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table. Specify the Port and Filtering Group of the new entry.
Click "Save."
Warning message about the Filtering Group.
The range of the IP Multicast is 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.
!
!
#O:!
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.9.2 MLD Snooping Configuration
This section provides MLD Snooping-related configuration. The MLD is for IPv6 Multicast Snooping. The
difference between the 2 IGMP and MLD is that the IGMP is applied to IPv4 Multicast stream while the
MLD is applied to IPv6 Multicast stream. While configuring the MLD Snooping configuration, the only thing
you need to understand is the IPv6 packet format.
4.9.2.1 Basic Configuration
This is basic configuration of the MLD, IPv6 Multicast Routing.
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected
stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Snooping Enabled
Enable Global MLD Snooping.
Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled
Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding. Note that disabling unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding may
lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery.
SSM Range
SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers to run the SSM service
model for the groups in the address range.
Leave Proxy Enabled
Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to
the router side.
Proxy Enabled
Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to
the router side.
Router Port
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads toward the
Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. Normally, the router port is the uplink port to the upper L3 Router
or IGMP Querier. For example, in below figure, the green ports of the 2 switches are Router ports.
!
!
#O"!
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port.
Fast Leave
Enable the fast leave on the port.
Throttling
Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.9.2.2 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration
!
Navigating the MLD Snooping VLAN Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table (the default being 20) selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the
VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the button
will update the displayed table starting from that or the next-closest VLAN Table match.
The last entry of the currently displayed entry is used as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached, "No more entries" appears in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
MLD Snooping VLAN Table Columns
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
MLD Snooping Enabled
Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Up to 64 VLANs can be selected.
MLD Querier
Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN.
Compatibility
!
!
#OA!
Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of
MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network. Allowed selections are MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1
and Forced MLDv2. The default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.
RV
Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link. The
allowed range is 1 to 255. The default robustness variable value is 2.
QI
Query Interval. The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the
Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds. The default query interval is 125 seconds.
QRI
Query Response Interval. The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response
Code inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds.
The default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).
LLQI
Last Listener Query Interval. The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used
to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in
response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages. It is also the Maximum Response Delay used
to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query
messages. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds. The default last listener query interval
is 10 in tenths of seconds (1 second).
URI
Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node's
initial report of interest in a multicast address. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds. The default
unsolicited report interval is 1 second.
Buttons
Refresh : Refreshes the displayed table starting from the “VLAN” input fields.
<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest
VLAN ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
#OG!
4.9.2.3 IPMC / MLD Snooping / Port Group Filtering
!
MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Port
The logical port for the settings.
Filtering Groups
The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered.
Adding New Filtering Group
Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table. Specify the Port and Filtering Group for the new
entry. Click "Save."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
!
4.10 LLDP Parameters
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral link layer protocol. LLDP information
is sent by devices from each of their interfaces at a fixed interval, in the form of an Ethernet Frame.
Each frame contains one LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU). Each LLDPDU is a sequence of
Type-Length-Value (TLV) structures. Each LLDP frame starts with the following mandatory TLVs:
Chassis ID, Port ID and Time-to-Live. The mandatory TLVs are followed by any number of optional
TLVs.
This section allows you to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings.
4.10.1 LLDP Configuration
Tx Interval
The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery
information up to date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value.
Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
Tx Hold
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be
considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds.
Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.
Tx Delay
If some configuration is changed (e.g., the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but the time
between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay cannot be
larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.
Tx Reinit
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown frame is
!
!
#OT!
transmitted to the neighboring units, signalling that the LLDP information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit
controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid
values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.
LLDP Port Configuration
The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
Port
The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.
Mode
Select LLDP mode.
Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighbor units is
analyzed.
Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out LLDP
information.
Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP information received from
neighbors.
Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information received from
neighbors.
CDP Aware
Select CDP awareness.
The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames. (The switch doesn't transmit CDP
frames.) CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.
Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors' table are decoded.
All other TLVs are discarded. (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in
the LLDP statistics.) CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors' table as shown below.
CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.
CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address TLV can
contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table.
CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.
CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.
Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities," but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that
are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP neighbors' table.
If all ports have CDP awareness disabled, the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor
devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled, all CDP frames are terminated by the switch.
Note: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled, the CDP information isn't removed immediately, but
gets removed when the hold time is exceeded.
!
!
#O1!
Port Descr
Optional TLV: When checked, the "port description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Sys Name
Optional TLV: When checked, the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Sys Descr
Optional TLV: When checked, the "system description" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Sys Capa
Optional TLV: When checked, the "system capability" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Mgmt Addr
Optional TLV: When checked, the "management address" is included in LLDP information transmitted.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.10.2 LLDP Media Configuration
This page allows you to configure the LLDE-MED. This function applies to VoIP devices which support
LLDP-MED.
!
!
#O>!
Fast!start!repeat!count!
Fast start repeat count
Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically
important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to advertise only those pieces of
information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types (for example, only advertise the
voice network policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU
space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge
of the network policy.
With this in mind, LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and
the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties. Initially, a
Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED
Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise
LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The LLDP-MED application will
temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED
neighbor has been detected in order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new
neighbors.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors, it is
recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the
neighbors receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start repeat count, it is possible to specify the number
of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is four times, given
that four LLDP frames with a 1-second interval will be transmitted,when an LLDP frame with new
information is received.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism are only intended to run
on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices, and as such do not
apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including Network Connectivity Devices, or other
types of links.
Coordinates!Location!
Latitude
Latitude Should be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either north of the equator or south of the equator.
Longitude
Longitude Should be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to specify the direction the either east of the prime meridian or west of the prime meridian.
Altitude
Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of four digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor-to-floor
dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and represents ground level at the
given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents the floor level associated with ground
level at the main entrance.
!
!
##O!
Map Datum
The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich;
The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88). This datum
pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal water (which would use Datum =
NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name: Greenwich; The
associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair is to be used when
referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.
Civic!Address!Location!
IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).
Country code
The two-letter ISO 3166 Country code in capital ASCII letters – Example: DK, DE or US.
State
National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).
County
County, parish, gun (Japan), district.
City
City, township, shi (Japan) – Example: Copenhagen.
City district
City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan).
Block ( Neighborhood)
Neighborhood block.
Street
Street –Example : Poppelvej.
Leading Street Direction
Leading street direction – Example: N.
Trailing street suffix
Trailing street suffix – Example: SW.
!
!
###!
Street suffix
Street suffix – Example : Ave, Platz.
House no.
House number – Example: 21.
House no. suffix
House number suffix – Example: A, ½.
Landmark
Landmark or vanity address – Example: Columbia University.
Additional location info.
Additional location info – Example: South Wing.
Name
Name (residence and office occupant) – Example: Flemming Jahn.
Zip code
Postal / ZIP code – Example: 2791.
Building
Building (structure) – Example: Low Library.
Apartment
Unit (Apartment, suite) – Example: Apt 42.
Floor
Floor – Example: 4.
Room No.
Room number – Example: 450F.
Place type
Place type – Example: Office.
Postal community name
Postal community name – Example: Leonia.
P.O. Box
Post office box ( P.O. Box ) – Example : 12345.
Additional code
!
!
##:!
Additional code – Example: 1320300003.
Emergency!Call!Service!
Emergency Call Service (e.g., E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
Emergency Call Service
Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used
during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This format consists of
a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling.
Policies!
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the
VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply for a set of
specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations are a very significant
issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific “real-time” network policy
requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.
The network policy attributes advertised:
1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types
supported on a given port. The application types specifically addressed:
1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Softphone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Video
6. Control / Signalling (Conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above)
A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different policies
per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, each corresponding
to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise
!
!
##"!
different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network
Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network
policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.
Delete
Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.
Policy ID
ID for the policy. This is auto-generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be
mapped to the specific ports.
Application Type
Intended use of the application types:
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting
interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of
deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
2. Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the
voice signaling than for the voice media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same
network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy.
3. Guest Voice - support a separate “limited feature-set” voice service for guest users and visitors with
their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signaling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for
the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media. This application type should not be advertised
if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or
laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at all, and are typically
configured to use an “untagged” VLAN or a single “tagged” data-specific VLAN. When a network policy
is defined for use with an untagged VLAN (see Tagged flag below), then the L2 priority field is ignored
and only the DSCP value has relevance.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar
appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast- or multicast-based video content distribution and other
similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment.
Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the
video signalling than for the video media. This application type should not be advertised if all the same
network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy.
Tag
Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN.
Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a
tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority
!
!
##A!
fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that both the
VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The tagged format
includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame format also includes priority
tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
VLAN ID
VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
L2 Priority
L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may specify
one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of 0 represents use
of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.
DSCP
DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined
in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63). A value of 0
represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
Adding a new policy
Click to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP for the
new policy. Click "Save."
Port!Policies!Configuration!
Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network
policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.
Port
The port number to which the configuration applies.
Policy ID
The set of policies that shall apply to a given port. The set of policies is selected by check marking the
check boxes that correspond to the policies.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
!
4.11 PoE Configuration
The function is applied to the PoE Switch model. If your switch is not a PoE switch, you will
not see these configuration commands.
This section allows you to inspect and configure the current port settings.
Power Over Ethernet Configuration
Reserved Power determined by
There are three modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power.
1. Allocation mode: In this mode, you allocate the amount of power that each port may reserve. The
allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields.
2. Class mode: In this mode, each port automatically determines how much power to reserve
according to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly. Four different
port classes exist, and one for 4, 7, 15.4 or 30 watts.
In this mode, the Maximum Power fields have no effect.
3. LLDP-MED mode: This mode is similar to the Class mode except that each port determines the
amount of power it reserves by exchanging PoE information using the LLDP protocol and reserves
power accordingly. If no LLDP information is available for a port, the port will reserve power using the
class mode.
In this mode, the Maximum Power fields have no effect.
For all modes: If a port uses more power than the reserved power for the port, the port is shut down.
!
!
##K!
Power Management Mode
There are 2 modes for configuring when to shut down the ports:
1. Actual Consumption: In this mode, the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for
all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power
consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port. The ports are shut down
according to the ports priority. If two ports have the same priority, the port with the highest port number
is shut down.
2. Reserved Power: In this mode, the ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the
amount of power that the power supply can deliver. In this mode, the port power is not turned on if the
%F requests more power than available from the power supply.
PoE Power Supply Configuration
Primary Power Supply (W)
Some switches support having two PoE power supplies. One is used as primary power source, and
one as a backup power source. If the switch doesn't support a backup power supply, only the primary
power supply settings will be shown. In case the primary power source fails, the backup power source
will take over. To be able to determine the amount of power the %F may use, the amount of power the
primary and backup power sources can deliver must be defined.
The valid values in this field range from 0 to 2000; however, the valid range of the power supply is up to
your product specification. Check the power budget of your switch and type the correct number here.
PoE!Port!Configuration!
Port
This is the logical port number for this row.
Ports that are not PoE-capable are grayed out and thus impossible to configure for PoE.
PoE Mode
The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port.
Disabled: PoE disabled for the port.
PoE: Enables PoE IEEE 802.3af (Class 4 PDs limited to 15.4 W).
PoE+: Enables PoE+ IEEE 802.3at (Class 4 PDs limited to 30 W).
Priority
The Priority represents the ports priority. There are three levels of power priority: Low, High and
Critical.
The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply
can deliver. In this case, the port with the lowest priority will be turned off starting from the port with the
highest port number.
!
!
##T!
Maximum Power
The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts
that can be delivered to a remote device.
The maximum allowed value is 30 W.
Buttons!
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
!
!
!
4.12 MAC Address Table Configuration
The MAC Address Table is configured on this page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic
MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here.
Aging!Configuration!
By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This removal is also
called aging.
Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds.
The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.
Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking Disable automatic aging.
MAC!Table!Learning!
If the learning mode for a given port is grayed out, another module is in control of the mode so that it
cannot be changed. An example of such a module is the MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X.
Each port can do learning based upon the following settings:
Auto
Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.
Disable
No learning is done.
Secure
Only static MAC entries are learned; all other frames are dropped.
Note: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before
changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by
using another non-secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface.
!
!
##>!
Static!MAC!Table!Configuration!
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain 64 entries.
The table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
VLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
MAC Address
The MAC address of the entry.
Port Members
Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed to modify the
entry.
!
!
#:O!
Adding a New Static Entry
Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address and port members
for the new entry. Click "Save."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.13 VLAN (Virtual LAN)
VLAN is short for Virtual LAN (Local Area Network.) VLAN technology allows you to divide
the physical ports into different logical groups. Each group is a virtual LAN, and the clients
within the VLAN are a broadcast domain. While the clients in different VLANs need to
communicate, the VLAN Overlapping setting or a additional upper router is needed.
There are 2 typical types of VLAN technology: Port-Based and Tag-Based. The port-based
VLAN is the simplest approach to LAN implementation. The idea is to assign the ports on a
switch to different VLANs. The settings are only applied to the ports of the switch.
Tag-based VLAN follows IEEE 802.1Q technology to tag VLAN IDs to the packets. The
tagged VID is not only applied to the switch, but also can be forwarded to the next switch and
a whole network, depending on how you’ve configured the switch settings.
4.13.1 VLAN Membership Configuration
The VLAN membership configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here. Up to 4096
VLANs are supported. This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting
port members of each VLAN.
Navigating!the!VLAN!Table!
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table (the default being 20) selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the
VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the button
will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match. The last entry
of the currently displayed VLAN entry is used as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached,
"No more entries" appears in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
Delete
To delete a VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next Save.
VLAN ID
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.
VLAN Name
!
!
#::!
Indicates the name of the VLAN. Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32. VLAN Name can
only contain letters or numbers. A VLAN name should contain at least one letter. A VLAN name can be
edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.
To include a port in a VLAN, check the box as .
To include a port in a forbidden port list, check the box as shown .
To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked as shown.
By default, no ports are members, and for every new VLAN entry all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New VLAN
Click to add a new VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the VLAN can be configured as
needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The VLAN is enabled when you click on "Save." A VLAN without any port members will be deleted
when you click "Save."
The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refreshes : Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAN ID” input fields.
<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest
VLAN ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
#:"!
!
4.13.2 VLAN Port Configuration
This page is used for configuring the switch’s port VLANs.
Ether type for Custom S-ports
This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S-ports. This is a global setting for all the Custom
S-ports.
Port
This is the logical port number of this row.
Port Type
Port can be one of the following types: Unaware, Customer port (C-port), Service port (S-port), Custom
Service port (S-custom-port)
If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
Ingress Filtering
Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing.
If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame,
the frame is discarded. By default, ingress filtering is disabled (no checkmark).
Frame Type
!
!
#:A!
Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged/untagged frames. This parameter
affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on
the port are discarded. By default, the field is set to All.
Port VLAN Mode
Configures the Port VLAN Mode. The allowed values are None or Specific. This parameter affects
VLAN ingress and egress processing.
If None is selected, a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port.
This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN-aware switches.
If Specific (the default value) is selected, a Port VLAN ID can be configured (see below). Untagged
frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID. If VLAN awareness is disabled, all
frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID. If the classified VLAN ID of a frame
transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID, a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is
inserted in the frame.
Port VLAN ID
Configures the VLAN identifier for the port. The allowed values are 1 through 4095. The default value is
1.
Note: The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.
Tx Tag
Determines egress tagging of a port. Untag_pvid - All VLANs except the configured PVID will be tagged.
Tag_all - All VLANs are tagged. Untag_all - All VLANs are untagged.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.14 Private VLANs
The Private VLAN feature provides the ability to extend the capabilities of a "standard" VLAN. The
additional concepts — Primary VLAN, Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN — are introduced in
Private VLAN.
The Primary VLAN can be considered the master in the master/slave relationship with the other two
sub-types, Community VLAN and Isolated VLAN. The switch Ports assigned with the primary VLAN are
able to access the ports in the two sub-tyupes.
Both the Community VLN and Isolated VLAN can be considered slaves in the master/slave relationship
with the primary VLAN. The switch ports assigned to a Community VLAN can see traffic from all other
devices in the same Community. The switch ports assigned to an Isolated VLAN can send traffic to the
primary VLAN, but CANNOT see traffic from other devices in the same Isolated VLAN.
In this section, the switch allows you to assign Private VLAN Member Configuration and Port Isolation
Configuration.
4.14.1 Private VLAN Membership Configuration
The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here.
Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or
removed here.
Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This
means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.
A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By default,
all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.
A VLAN-unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple Private
VLANs.
Private VLANs do not work across the stack.
Delete
To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next save.
Private VLAN ID
Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.
Port Members
!
!
#:K!
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include a port in a Private
VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN, make sure the box is
unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Private VLAN
Click to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the private VLAN can be
configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number
range. Any values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to
discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to the editing and make a correction.
The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save."
The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.14.2 Port Isolation Configuration
Overview!
This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN..
A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN.
The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
This feature works across the stack.
!
!
#:T!
Configuration!
Port Members
A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation is enabled on
that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port.
By default, port isolation is disabled on all ports.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
!
4.15 VCL
!
4.15.1 VCL / MAC-Based VLAN Configuration
The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding and deleting
MAC-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static
entries.
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To include a port in a
MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the MAC-based VLAN, make
sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New MAC-based VLAN
Click “Add new Entry.” No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN
ID are 1 through 4095.
The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click "Save." A MAC-based VLAN without any port
members will be deleted when you click "Save."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Auto-Refresh: Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAN ID” input fields.
<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest
VLAN ID.
>>: Update the table, staring with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
#:>!
4.15.2 VCL / Protocol-based VLAN
Protocol to Group Mapping Table
This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries
and to see and delete already-mapped entries for the switch.
Frame Type
Frame Type can have one of the following values:
1. Ethernet
2. LLC
3. SNAP
Note: On changing the Frame type field, valid values of the following text field will vary depending on
the new frame type you select.
Value
Valid values that can be entered in this text field depend on the option selected from the the preceding
Frame Type selection menu.
Below are the criteria for three different Frame Types:
For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type are called etypes.
Valid values for etypes range from 0x0600 to 0xffff.
For LLC: Valid values in this case are composed of two different sub-values.
a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
For SNAP: Valid values in this case also are composed of two different sub-values.
a OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in the format of xx-xx-xx, where each pair (xx)
in the string is a hexadecimal value that ranges from 0x00 to 0xff.
b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal (000000), the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType) field value
for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization, the protocol
ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP.
!
!
#"O!
In other words, if the value in the OUI field is 00-00-00, then the value of PID will be etype
(0x0600-0xffff); and if the value of OUI is other than 00-00-00, then the valid value of PID will be any
value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.
Group Name
A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character-long string for every entry which consists of a
combination of letters (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).
Note: special characters and underscores (_) are not allowed.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry
Click to add a new entry in the mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame Type, Value
and the Group Name can be configured as needed.
The button can be used to undo the addition of a new entry.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
VLC / Protocol-based VLAN / Group Name to VLAN mapping Table
!
!
!!This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch. The displayed
settings:
Group Name
A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters in a combination of letters (a-z or A-Z) and
integers (0-9). No special characters are allowed. Whichever Group name you try to map to a VLAN
must be present in the Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be pre-used by any other existing
mapping entry on this page.
!
!
#"#!
VLAD!ID
Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping. To include
a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the mapping, make sure the
box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.
Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry
Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table, the Group Name, VLAN
ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.15.3 VCL / IP Subnet-based VLAN
The IP subnet-based VLAN enties can be configured here. This page allows for adding, updating and
deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows
only static entries.
Delete
To delete a IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be deleted!in
the stack.
VCE ID
Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. Its value ranges from 0 to 256. If a VCE ID is 0,
the application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry. Deletion and lookup of IP subnet-based
VLAN are based on the VCE ID.
!
!
#":!
IP Address
Indicates the IP address.
Mask Length
Indicates the network mask length.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry. To include a port
in an IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet-based
VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are
unchecked.
Adding a New IP subnet-based VLAN
Click!"Add!New!Entry"!to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table,
and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any IP address/mask can be
configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Save." The!"Delete"!button can be
used to undo the addition of new IP subnet-based VLANs.
Buttons!
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Auto-refresh: Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3
seconds.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table.
!
!
4.16 Voice VLAN Configuration
4.16.1 Voice VLAN / Configuration
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN so the switch can classify
and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port: one for voice, one
for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN
ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.
Mode
Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. You
must disable the MSTP feature before enabling
Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress
filtering. Possible modes:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mod operation.
VLAN ID
Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a
unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot
equal each port PVID. It is a conflict in
configuration if the value equals management
VID, MVR VID, PVID, etc. The allowed range is
1 to 4095.
Aging Time
Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning
aging time. The allowed range is 10 to 1000000
seconds. It is used when security mode or auto
detect mode is enabled. In other cases, it will
be based on hardware aging time. The actual
aging time will be situated between the [age
time; 2 * age time] interval.
Traffic Class
Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply to this class.
!
!
#"A!
Port Mode
Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode.
Possible modes:
Disabled: from Voice VLAN.
Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port
and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.
Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
Port Security
The Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all non-telephonic MAC addresses
in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible port modes:
Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Port Discovery Protocol
Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled.
You should enable the LLDP feature before configuring the discovery protocol to "LLDP" or "Both."
Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart the auto-detect process. Possible
discovery protocols:
,BJ: Detect telephony device by OUI address.
CCF%: Detect telephony device by LLDP.
Both: Both OUI and LLDP.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
#"G!
4.16.2 Voice VLAN / OUI Configuration
Configure the Voice VLAN OUI table on this page. The maximum entry number is 16. Modifying the
OUI table will restart auto-detection of the OUI process.
Delete
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
Telephony OUI
A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It must be 6
characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).
Description
The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to.
The allowed string length is 0 to 32.
Buttons
Add new entry: Click to add a new access management entry.
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed the table starting from the “VLAND ID” input fields.
<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest
VLAN.
!
!
!
!
4.17 QoS
4.17.1 QoS / Ingress Port Classification
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
QoS class
Controls the default QoS class; i.e., the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way. There is a
one-to-one mapping between QoS class, queue and priority. A QoS class of 0 (zero) has the lowest
priority.
DP level
Controls the default Drop Precedence Level; i.e., the DP level for frames not classified in any other
way.
PCP
Controls the default PCP for untagged frames.
DEI
Controls the default DEI for untagged frames.
Tag Class
Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
Disabled: Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames.
!
!
#"T!
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.
Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.
DSCP Based
Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.17.2 QoS / Ingress Port Policer Config
This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports. The settings relate to the
currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The port number for which the configuration below applies.
Enabled
Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.
!
!
#"1!
Rate
Controls the rate for the policer. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to 100-1000000 when
the "Unit" is "kbps" or "fps," and it is restricted to 1-3300 when the "Unit" is "Mbps" or "kfps."
Unit
Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps . The default value is "kbps."
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.17.3 QoS / Port Scheduler
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers.
Mode
Shows the scheduling mode for this port.
Qn
Shows the weight for this queue and port.
!
!
!
#">!
4.17.4 QoS / Egress Port Shapers
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers.
Qn
Shows "disabled" or actual queue shaper rate; e.g., "800 Mbps."
Port
Shows "disabled" or actual port shaper rate; e.g., "800 Mbps."
!
!
#AO!
!
!
4.17.5 QoS / Port Tag Remarking
This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking.
Mode
Shows the tag remarking mode for this port.
Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.
Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.
!
!
!
#A#!
!
QoS / DSCP
4.17.6 QoS / Port DSCP Configuration
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
Port
The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure DSCP ingress and egress settings.
Ingress
In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports.
There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:
1. Translate
2. Classify
1. Translate
To Enable the Ingress Translation, click the checkbox.
2. Classify
Classification for a port has four possible values.
Disabled: No Ingress DSCP Classification.
DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP.
!
!
#A:!
Translation window for the specific DSCP.
All: Classify all DSCP.
Egress
Port Egress Rewriting offers four options:
Disabled: No Egress rewrite.
Enable: Rewrite enabled without remapping.
Remap DP Unaware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP
value. The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation -> Egress Remap DP0
table.
Remap DP Aware: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP
value. Depending on the DP level of the frame, the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the
DSCP Translation -> Egress Remap DP0 table or from the DSCP Translation -> Egress Remap DP1
table.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.7 QoS / DSCP-based QoS Ingress Classification
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for
all switches.
The displayed settings:
!
!
#A"!
DSCP
Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64.
Trust
Controls whether a specific DSCP value is trusted. Only frames with trusted DSCP values are mapped
to a specific QOs class and Drop Precedence Level. Frames with untrusted DSCP values are treated
as non-IP frames.
QoS Class
The QoS class value can be from 0 to 7.
DPL
Drop Precedence Level (0-1).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
#AA!
4.17.8 QoS / DSCP Translation
This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches. DSCP
translation can be done in Ingress or Egress.
The displayed settings:
DSCP
Maximum number of supported DSCP values is 64, and valid DSCP values range from 0 to 63.
Ingress
Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new a DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and
DPL map.
There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation:
1. Translate
2. Classify
1. Translate
DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to DSCP values in the range of 0 to 63..
2. Classify
Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.
!
!
#AG!
Egress
Configurable parameters for Egress side:
1. Remap DP0 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0.
2. Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1.
1. Remap DP0
Select the DSCP value from the menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63.
2. Remap DP1
Select the DSCP value from the menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
4.17.9 QoS / DSCP Classification
This page allows you to configure the mapping of QoS class and Drop Precedence Level to DSCP
values.
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.
The displayed settings:
QoS Class
Actual QoS class.
!
!
#AK!
DPL
Actual Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP
Select the classified DSCP value (0-63).
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
4.17.10 QoS / Control List Configuration
!
QoS Control List Configuration
This page shows the QoS Control List(QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes a
QCE that is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch.
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.
QCE#
Indicates the index of QCE.
Port
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Frame Type
Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types:
Any: The QCE will match all frame types.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.
!
!
#AT!
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.
IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.
IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
SMAC
Displays the OUI field of a Source MAC address; i.e., first three octet (byte) of a MAC address.
DMAC
Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frames. Possible values:
Any: All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed.
Unicast: Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Multicast: Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed.
Broadcast: Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowed.
The default value is “Any.”
VID
Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095 or “Any.”
PCP
Priority Code Point: Valid values for PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or in a range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5,
6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or “Any.”
DEI
Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid values of DEI can be 0, 1 or “Any.”
Conflict
Displays QCE status. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available. In that
case, it shows conflict status as “Yes”; otherwise, it is always “No.” Note that conflict can be resolved by
releasing the resource required by the QCE and clicking “Refresh.”
Action
Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the
frame's content.
There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.
Class: Classified QoS class..
DPL: Classified Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classified DSCP value.
!
!
#A1!
Modification Buttons
You can modify each QCE (QoS Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:
: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.
: Edits the QCE.
: Moves the QCE up the list.
: Moves the QCE down the list.
: Deletes the QCE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings.
Buttons
Refresh : Click to refresh the page. This will help to check the latest conflict status after releasing the
resources.
!
!
4.17.11 QoS / Storm Control Configuration
Storm control for the switch is configured on this page.
There is a unicast storm rate control, a multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control.
These only affect flooded frames; i.e., frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present on the MAC
Address table.
The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or broadcast traffic across
the switch.
Note: Frames, which are sent to the CPU of the switch are always limited to approximately 4 kpps. For
example, broadcasts in the management VLAN are limited to this rate. The management VLAN is
configured on the IP setup page.
Frame Type
The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here: Unicast, Multicast or Broadcast.
Enable
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.
!
!
#A>!
Rate
The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values:
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, 1024K,
2048K, 4096K, 8192K, 16384K or 32768K.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.18 Mirroring Configuration
Configure port Mirroring on this page.
To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, on a mirror port, where a
frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.
The traffic to be copied on the mirror port is selected as follows:
All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).
All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).
Port to mirror on
Port to mirror is also known as the mirror port. Frames from ports that have either source (rx) or
destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port. Disabled disables mirroring.
Mirror!Port!Configuration!
The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling.
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Mode
Select mirror mode.
Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames transmitted are not
mirrored.
Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames received are not
mirrored.
!
!
#G#!
Disabled: Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.
Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port.
Note: For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames
on the mirror port. Because of this, the mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx
only.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
#G:!
4.19 UPnP Configuration
Configure UPnP on this page.
Mode
Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:
Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.
Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.
When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU.
The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled.
TTL
The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid values are in the range
of 1 to 255.
Advertising Duration
The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or
they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If a control point does not
receive any message within the duration, it will think that the switch no longer exists. Due to the
unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to
be done at less than one-half of the advertising duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP
messages periodically at the interval one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid
values are in the range 100 to 86400.
Buttons
Save: Click to save changes.
Reset: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
!
!
4.20 sFlow Configuration
Sampled Flow (sFlow) is a traffic monitoring technology mainly used to collect and analyze traffic
statistics. The switch supports sFlow feature. The sFlow software agent collects traffic statistics and
packet information from the sFlow-enabled interfaces on the switch, encapsulates them into sFlow
packets. The sFlow agent then sends the packet to a specified sFlow collector, the IP Address you
assigned in the switch UI. The sFlow collector analyzes the sFlow packets and displays the result.
sFlow has the following two sampling mechanisms:
* Flow sampling: Packet-based sampling, used to obtain packet content information.
* Counter sampling: Time-based sampling, used to obtain port traffic statistics.
Type the IP address of sFlow collector in the Receiver Configuration. The sFlow agent will send the
collected information to it.
This next page displays the configured sFlow Samplers on the switch.
sFlow Ports
List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured.
sFlow Instance
Configured sFlow instance for the port number.
Flow Sampling
Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified number, reading the
first "Max Hdr Size" bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis.
The attributes associated with the flow sampling are sampler type, sampling rate and maximum header
size.
!
!
#GA!
Sampler Type
The configured sampler type on the port can be None, RX, TX or ALL.
The default value is "none."
Sampling Rate
Configured sampling rate on the ports.
Max Hdr Size
Configured size of the header of the sampled frame.
Counter Sampling
Counter sampling performs periodic, time-based samplings or polling of counters associated with an
interface enabled for sFlow.
The attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval.
Polling Interval
Configured polling interval for the counter sampling.
!
!
!
!
!
5. Feature Configuration - CLI
The Command Line Interface (CLI) is the user interface to the switch’s embedded software
system. You can view the system information, show the status, configure the switch and
receive a response back from the system by keying in a command.
After you log in to the switch through the console CLI, you can see the ">" mark. You can
type the command after it. Some useful commands:
Type “<group>” to enter command group; e.g., “port” to the port configuration.
Type “<group> ?” to get list of group commands; e.g., “port ?.” You can follow the instruction
step by step to finish the command.
Type “<command> ?” to get help on a command, e.g., “port mode ?.”
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
Type "logout" in root level to leave the command line interface.
Click "Enter" key after finish the command.
Click "Up" key to repeat the previous commands.
Commands may be abbreviated, e.g., “por co' instead of “port configuration.” For quick
configuration, the abbreviated type is helpful.
Example: Configure the System Contact to Orwell
You can go to system group or type the full name in root level. Both of the methods can
meet your needs.
In system group mode:
System>contact Orwell
In root level:
>sys contact Orwell
Note: This chapter just lists the relevant command lines of the feature settings for your
reference. You can see the detailed explanations of the commands and features in Chapter
4.
5.1 System Configuration
Feature
Command Line
System Information
System Group
Enter the System Configuration Group to do additional
configuration.
>system
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
System>
System Contact
Syntax:
System Name [<name>]
Parameters:
!
!
#GK!
<name>: System name string. (1-255)
Example: Contact Name = Orwell
System>contact Orwell
System Name
Syntax:
System Name [<name>]
Parameters:
<name>: System name string. (1-255)
Example: Contact Name = poeswitch
System>name poeswitch
poeswitch:/>
(After given system name, the prompt character will be
changed automatically.)
System Location
Syntax:
System Location [<location>]
Parameters:
<location>: System location string. (1-255)
Example: Location Name
poeswitch:/System>loca fll_01
Time Zone Offset
Syntax:
System Timezone [<offset>]
Parameters:
<offset>: Time zone offset in minutes (-720 to 720) relative to
UTC
Example: Time Zone = 100
poeswitch:/System>time 100
IP Configuration
IP Group
Enter the IP Configuration Group
poeswitch:/>ip
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
poeswitch:/IP>
DHCP Client
Syntax:
IP DHCP [enable|disable]
poeswitch:/IP>dhcp en
IP Setting (Address,
Mask, Gateway,
Managed VID)
Syntax:
IP Setup [<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>] [<ip_router>] [<vid>]
Example: IP=192.168.2.2, Mask=255.255.255.0, Gateway:
192.168.2.254, VID=1
poeswitch:/IP>setup 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 192.168.2.254 1
NTP
Enable NTP Mode by the below command:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp mode en
Type the NTP Server address settings by the below command:
!
!
#GT!
Syntax:
IP NTP Server Add <server_index> <ip_addr_string>
IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add <server_index> <server_ipv6>
IP NTP Server Delete <server_index>
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp ser add 1 192.168.100.1
poeswitch:/IP>ntp ser add 2 168.95.1.1
Check the NTP Server settings by below command:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp conf
IP NTP Configuration:
=====================
NTP Mode : Enabled
Idx Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string
--- ------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.100.1
2 168.95.1.1
3
4
5
DNS Server
Syntax:
IP DNS [<ip_addr>]
Parameters:
<ip_addr>: IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>dns 168.95.1.1
DNS Proxy
Syntax: IP DNS_Proxy [enable|disable]
poeswitch:/IP>dns_proxy en
IPv6 Configuration
IPv6 Commands
Syntax:
IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG [enable|disable]
IP IPv6 Setup [<ipv6_addr>] [<ipv6_prefix>] [<ipv6_router>]
IP IPv6 State <ipv6_addr> [enable|disable]
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count
<ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Auto Configuration
Syntax:
IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG [enable|disable]
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ipv6 auto en
IPv6 Address Setting
(Address, Prefix,
Syntax:
IP IPv6 Setup [<ipv6_addr>] [<ipv6_prefix>] [<ipv6_router>]
!
!
#G1!
Router)
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ipv6 setup 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800 48
2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f8ff
IPv6 Ping Test
Syntax:
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count
<ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ipv6 ping6 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800
NTP
NTP Mode
Enable NTP Mode by below command:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp mode en
NTP Server Address
Setting
Syntax:
Type the NTP Server address settings by below command:
IP NTP Server Add <server_index> <ip_addr_string>
IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add <server_index> <server_ipv6>
IP NTP Server Delete <server_index>
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp ser add 1 192.168.100.1
poeswitch:/IP>ntp ser add 2 168.95.1.1
NTP Setting Status
Check the NTP Server settings by below command:
poeswitch:/IP>ntp conf
IP NTP Configuration:
=====================
NTP Mode : Enabled
Idx Server IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name string
--- ------------------------------------------------------
1 192.168.100.1
2 168.95.1.1
3
4
5
System Log
Server Mode
Syntax:
System Log Server Mode [enable|disable]
Example:
poeswitch:/System>log server mode en
Server Address
Syntax:
System Log Server Address [<ip_addr_string>]
Example:
poeswitch:/System>log server add 192.168.2.100
Syslog Level
Syntax:
System Log Level [info|warning|error]
!
!
#G>!
Information:
poeswitch:/System>log level inf
Warning:
poeswitch:/System>log level war
Error:
poeswitch:/System>log level err
Clear Syslog
Syntax:
System Log Clear [all|info|warning|error]
poeswitch:/System>log clear all
System Log
Configuration
poeswitch:/System>log conf
System Log Configuration:
=========================
System Log Server Mode : Enabled
System Log Server Address : 192.168.2.100
System Log Level : Error
!
5.2 Power Reduction
!
Feature
Command Line
LED Power Reduction
LED Intensity Times
Syntax:
led_power timers [<hour>] [<intensity>]
Parameters:
<hour> : The hour (0-24) at which to change LEDs intensity
<intensity>: The LED intensity in % (0-100)
Example: (Time=2:00, Intensity: 30%)
led_power>timer 2 30
Maintenance
Syntax:
led_power maintenance [<maintenance_time>]
[on_at_errors|leave_at_errors]
Parameters:
<maintenance_time> : Time in seconds (0-65535) that the
LEDs shall be turned on, when any port changes link state
on_at_errors|leave_at_errors: on_at_error if LEDs shall be
turned on if any errors has been detected. leave_at_errors if
no LED change shall happen when errors have been detected
Example:
led_power>main 20
led_power>main 20 on (20 sec., on_ad_errors enabled)
EEE Configuration
!
!
#KO!
EEE Port
Configuration
Syntax:
EEE Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
enable : Enable EEE
disable: Disable EEE
Example: Enable Port 1-5
EEE>mode 1-5 en
Urgent Queue of Port
Syntax:
EEE Urgent_queues [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
Parameters:
<port_list> : Port list or “all”; default: All ports
<queue_list>: List of queues to configure as urgent queues
(1-8 or none)
Example: Enable Urgent_Queue on Port 1-5
EEE>urge 1-5 2
!
5.3 Port Configuration
Feature
Command Line
Port Configuration
Port Group
poeswitch:/>port
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
poeswitch:/Port>
Link State
Syntax:
Port State [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example: Enable/Disable Port 1 State. After port 1 is
disabled, the port can't access the switch.
Port>state 1 en
Port>state 1 dis
Link Speed and
Duplex
Syntax:
Port Mode [<port_list>]
[auto|10hdx|10fdx|100hdx|100fdx|1000fdx|sfp_auto_ams|100
0x_ams|100fx_ams|1000x|100fx]
Example:
Port>mode 2 1000fdx (Configure port 2 to 1000 Full Duplex)
Port>mode 1-4 1000fdx (Configure port 1-4 to 1000 Full
Duplex)
Flow Control
Syntax:
Port Flow Control [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
Port>flow cont 1 en (Enable Flow Control on Port 1)
Port>flow cont 1 dis (Disable Flow Control on Port 2)
Maximum Frame
Syntax:
!
!
#K#!
Size
Port MaxFrame [<port_list>] [<max_frame>]
Example: Set port 1-24's maximum frame size to 9K jumbo
frame
Port>maxf 1-24 9600
Port Status
Port Status
Port>conf 1-2
Port Configuration:
===================
Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link
---- -------- ----------- ------------ -------- -------- --------- ----
1 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down
2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx
.............
Port Mode
Port>mode 2
Port Mode Link
---- ----------- ----
2 Auto 1Gfdx
Port Status - All
Information
poeswitch:/Port>config
Port Configuration:
===================
Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link
---- -------- ----------- ------------ -------- -------- --------- ----
1 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down
2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx
3 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard Down
..............
Status of Link UP
ports
poeswitch:/Port>conf all up
Port Configuration:
===================
Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link
---- -------- ----------- ------------ -------- -------- --------- ----
2 Enabled Auto Disabled 9600 Disabled Discard 1Gfdx
Port Statistic
poeswitch:/Port>statistic 1
Port 1 Statistics:
Rx Packets: 0 Tx Packets: 0
Rx Octets: 0 Tx Octets: 0
Rx Unicast: 0 Tx Unicast: 0
...................
!
5.4 Security Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
!
!
#K:!
Security-Switch Configuration
Security -Switch
Group
>securi swi
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
Security/Switch>?
Command Groups:
---------------
Security Switch Users : User management
Security Switch Privilege: Privilege level
Security Switch Auth : Authentication
Security Switch SSH : Secure Shell
Security Switch HTTPS : Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket
Layer
Security Switch Access : Access management
Security Switch SNMP : Simple Network Management Protocol
Security Switch RMON : Remote Network Monitoring
User Configuration
Security/Switch>user ?
Available Commands:
Security Switch Users Configuration
Security Switch Users Add <user_name> <password>
<privilege_level>
Security Switch Users Delete <user_name>
Add New User
Syntax:
Security Switch Users Add <user_name> <password>
<privilege_level>
Example: Add New User Name, Password with highest
privilege, Name: Orwell, Password: password, Privilege: 15
Security/Switch>users add Orwell password 15
Delete the User
Syntax:
Security Switch Users Delete <user_name>
Example: Delete the User, Orwell from User Name database
Security/Switch>users del Orwell
User Name Database
Security/Switch>users conf
Users Configuration:
====================
User Name Privilege Level
-------------------------------- ---------------
admin 15
Orwell 15
Privilege Level
Syntax:
Security Switch Privilege Level Group <group_name>
[<cro>] [<crw>] [<sro>] [<srw>]
(cro=Configuration Read-Only, crw=Configuration/Excute
Read/Write, sro=Status/Statistics Read-Only,
srw=Status/Statistics Read/Write)
!
!
#K"!
Example: Set Privilege level of VLAN Group
Security/Switch/Privilege>level group VLANs 10 10 10 10
(cro=10, crw=10, sro=10, srw=10)
Privilege Level
Configuration Table
Security/Switch>pri level conf
Privilege Level Configuration:
==============================
Privilege Current Level: 15
Group Name Privilege Level
CRO CRW SRO SRW
-------------------------------- --- --- --- ---
Aggregation 5 10 5 10
Debug 15 15 15 15
Diagnostics 5 10 5 10
Authentication
Method
Syntax:
Security Switch Auth Method [console|telnet|ssh|web]
[none|local|radius|tacacs+] [enable|disable]
Example: Configure Telnet Authentication method to Radius
Enable
Security/Switch>auth method telnet radius en
Authentication
Configuration
Security/Switch>auth conf
Auth Configuration:
===================
Client Authentication Method Local Authentication Fallback
------- ---------------------- -----------------------------
console local Disabled
telnet local Disabled
ssh local Disabled
web local Disabled
SSH
Syntax:
Security Switch SSH Mode [enable|disable]
Example:
Security/Switch>ssh mode en
Security/Switch>ssh mode dis
HTTPS
Syntax:
Security Switch HTTPS Mode [enable|disable]
Security/Switch>https mode en
Security/Switch>https mode dis
Security Switch HTTPS Redirect [enable|disable]
Security/Switch>https mode en (Must enabled HTTPS)
Security/Switch>https redi en
Result:
Security/Switch>https conf
HTTPS Configuration:
!
!
#KA!
====================
HTTPS Mode: Enabled
HTTPS Redirect Mod : Enabled
Access Management
Syntax:
Security Switch Access Add <access_id> <start_ip_addr>
<end_ip_addr> [web] [snmp
] [telnet]
Example: Limit the IP range from the 192.168.2.1 to
192.168.2.10 can access the web UI.
Security/Switch>access add 1 192.168.2.1 192.168.2.10 web
SNMP System
Configuration
(Mode, Version,
Read /Write
Community)
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Version [1|2c|3]
Security Switch SNMP Read Community [<community>]
Security Switch SNMP Write Community [<community>]
Example:
Security/Switch>snmp mode en
Security/Switch>snmp ver 2c
Security/Switch/SNMP>read com abc
Security/Switch/SNMP>write com orwell
Result:
SNMP Configuration:
===================
SNMP Mode : Enabled
SNMP Version : 2c
Read Community : abc
Write Community : orwell
SNMP Community
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Community Add <community>
[<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>]
Security Switch SNMP Community Delete <index>
Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup [<index>]
Example:
Security/Switch>snmp commu add abc
Security/Switch>snmp commu add test 192.168.2.100
255.255.255.0
SNMP Trap Server
Setting
Enter the SNMP Trap Configuration Group
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap
Type “up” to move up one level or “/” to go to root level
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Version [1|2c|3]
!
!
#KG!
Security Switch SNMP Trap Community [<community>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination [<ip_addr_string>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination [<ipv6_addr>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>mode ena
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>version 2c
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>community public
Security/Switch/SNMP/Trap>destination 192.168.2.100
Result:
Trap Mode : Enabled
Trap Version : 2c
Trap Community : public
Trap Destination : 192.168.2.100
Trap IPv6 Destination : ::
SNMP Trap Event
Setting
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure
[enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Link-up [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode [enable|disable]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout [<timeout>]
Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times [<retries>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap auth fai en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap link-up en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info mode en
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info time 5
Security/Switch/SNMP>trap info ret times 5
Result:
Trap Authentication Failure : Enabled
Trap Link-up and Link-down : Enabled
Trap Inform Mode : Enabled
Trap Inform Timeout (seconds) : 5
Trap Inform Retry Times : 5
SNMPv3 User
Syntax:
Security Switch SNMP User Add <engineid> <user_name>
[MD5|SHA] [<auth_password>] [DES] [<priv_password>]
Example:
Security/Switch/SNMP>user add 800007e5017f000001 orwell
Security/Switch/SNMP>user add 800007e5017f000001 andy
md5 andy123
Result:
SNMPv3 Users Table:
Idx Engine ID User Name Level Auth Priv
--- --------- -------------------------------- -------------- ---- ----
1 Local default_user NoAuth, NoPriv None None
2 Local orwell NoAuth, NoPriv None None
3 Local andy Auth, NoPriv MD5 None
Number of entries: 3
!
!
#KK!
RMON
In Security/Switch Group, the system supports 4 types of
RMON groups. Follow the RMON Syntax to add the entries.
Syntax:
Security/Switch>rmon ?
Statistics:
Security Switch RMON Statistics Add <stats_id>
<data_source>
Security Switch RMON Statistics Delete <stats_id>
Security Switch RMON Statistics Lookup [<stats_id>]
Histroy:
Security Switch RMON History Add <history_id>
<data_source> [<interval>] [<buckets>]
Security Switch RMON History Delete <history_id>
Security Switch RMON History Lookup [<history_id>]
Alarm:
Security Switch RMON Alarm Add <alarm_id> <interval>
<alarm_vairable> [absolute|delta] <rising_threshold>
<rising_event_index> <falling_threshold>
<falling_event_index> [rising|falling|both]
Security Switch RMON Alarm Delete <alarm_id>
Security Switch RMON Alarm Lookup [<alarm_id>]
Event:
Security Switch RMON Event Add <event_id>
[none|log|trap|log_trap] [<community>] [<description>]
Security Switch RMON Event Delete <event_id>
Security Switch RMON Event Lookup [<event_id>]
Security-Network Configuration
Limit Control
Limit Control -
System Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network Limit Configuration [<port_list>]
Security Network Limit Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit Aging [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit Agetime [<age_time>]
Example:
Security/Network>limit mode enable
Security/Network>limit agin enable
Security/Network>limit agetim 1000
Result:
Port Security Limit Control Configuration:
==========================================
Mode : Enabled
Aging : Disabled
Age Period: 3600
Limit Control - Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network Limit Port [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Security Network Limit Limit [<port_list>] [<limit>]
Security Network Limit Action [<port_list>]
[none|trap|shut|trap_shut]
!
!
#KT!
Security Network Limit Reopen [<port_list>]
Example:
Security/Network>limit port 1 enabl
Security/Network>limit limit 1 5
Security/Network>limit action 1 trap
Network Access Server Configuration (also known as IEEE 802.1X)
NAS System
Configuration
Syntax:
Mode:
Security Network NAS Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network NAS Reauthentication [enable|disable]
Time Settings
Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod [<reauth_period>]
Security Network NAS EapolTimeout [<eapol_timeout>]
Security Network NAS Agetime [<age_time>]
Security Network NAS Holdtime [<hold_time>]
Radius-Assigned
Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Guest VLAN
Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN [global|<port_list>]
[enable|disable] [<vid>] [<reauth_max>]
[<allow_if_eapol_seen>]
Example:
Guest_VLAN Global Enabled, Guest VLAN ID=100,
Max. Re-Authentication Count = 10,
Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL See = Enable
Security/Network>nas gues glob en 100 10 en
NAS Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network NAS State [<port_list>]
[auto|authorized|unauthorized|single|multi|macbased]
auto= Port-based 802.1X
authorized = Force Authorized
unauthorized = Force Unauthorized
single = Single 802.1X
multi= Multi 802.1X
macbased = MAC_Based Authentication
Example:
Security/Network>nas state 2 auto
ACL (Access Control List)
ACL Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Action [<port_list>] [permit|deny]
[<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<mirror>] [<logging>]
[<shutdown>]
!
!
#K1!
Parameters:
<port_list> : Port list or “all”; default: All ports
permit : Permit forwarding (default)
deny : Deny forwarding
<rate_limiter> : Rate limiter number (1-15) or “disable”
<port_redirect>: Port list for copy of frames or “disable”
<mirror> : Mirror of frames: enable|disable
<logging> : System logging of frames: log|log_disable
<shutdown> : Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable
Example:
Security/Network/ACL>Action 1 permit 10 dis en log shut
Result:
ACL Configuration:
==================
Port Policy Action Rate L. Port C. Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter
---- ------ ------ ------- ------- -------- -------- -------- -------
1 0 Permit 10 Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 0
Rate Limiter
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Rate [<rate_limiter_list>] [<rate_unit>]
[<rate>]
Parameters:
<rate_limiter_list>: Rate limiter list (1-16), default: All rate
limiters
<rate_unit> : IP flags: pps|kbps, default: pss
<rate>: Rate in pps (0-100) or kbps (0, 100, 2*100, 3*100, ...,
1000000)
Example: Rate Limiter ID=10, Rate = 300kbps
Security/Network/ACL>rate 10 kbps 300
Result:
Rate Limiter Rate
------------ ----
..........
9 1 PPS
10 300 KBPS
.......
ACL Policy
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Policy [<port_list>] [<policy>]
Example:
Security/Network/ACL>policy 1 2
Access Control List
Syntax:
Security Network ACL Add [<ace_id>] [<ace_id_next>] [(port
<port_list>)] [(policy <policy> <policy_bitmask>)]
[<tagged>] [<vid>] [<tag_prio>] [<dmac_type>] [(etype
[<etype>] [<smac>] [<dmac>]) |
(arp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<smac>] [<arp_opcode>] [<arp_flags>]) |
(ip [<sip>] [<dip>] [<protocol>] [<ip_flags>]) |
(icmp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<icmp_type>] [<icmp_code>]
[<ip_flags>]) |
(udp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]) |
(tcp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]
!
!
#K>!
[<tcp_flags>])]
[permit|deny] [<rate_limiter>] [<port_redirect>] [<mirror>]
[<logging>][<shutdown>]
Parameters:
<ace_id> : ACE ID (1-256), default: Next available ID
<ace_id_next> : Next ACE ID (1-256), default: Add ACE last
port : Port ACE keyword
<port_list> : Port list or “all”; default: All ports
policy : Policy ACE keyword
<policy> : Policy number (0-255)
<policy_bitmask>: Policy number bitmask (0x0-0xFF)
<tagged> : Tagged of frames: any|enable|disable
<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095) or “any”
<tag_prio> : VLAN tag priority (0-7) or “any”
<dmac_type> : DMAC type:
any|unicast|multicast|broadcast
etype : Ethernet Type keyword
<etype> : Ethernet Type: 0x600 - 0xFFFF or “any”
but excluding 0x800(IPv4) 0x806(ARP) and 0x86DD(IPv6)
<smac> : Source MAC address (“xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx”
or “xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx” or “xxxxxxxxxxxx”; x is a hexadecimal
digit) or 'any'
<dmac> : Destination MAC address
(“xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx” or “xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx” or “xxxxxxxxxxxx”; x
is a hexadecimal digit) or “any”
arp : ARP keyword
<sip> : Source IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or “any”
<dip> : Destination IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or “any”
<arp_opcode> : ARP operation code: any|arp|rarp|other
<arp_flags> : ARP flags: request|smac|tmac|len|ip|ether
[0|1|any]
ip : IP keyword
<protocol> : IP protocol number (0-255) or “any”
<ip_flags> : IP flags: ttl|options|fragment [0|1|any]
icmp : ICMP keyword
<icmp_type> : ICMP type number (0-255) or “any”
<icmp_code> : ICMP code number (0-255) or “any”
udp : UDP keyword
<sport> : Source UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or
'any'
<dport> : Destination UDP/TCP port range (0-65535)
or 'any'
tcp : TCP keyword
<tcp_flags> : TCP flags: fin|syn|rst|psh|ack|urg [0|1|any]
permit : Permit forwarding (default)
deny : Deny forwarding
<rate_limiter> : Rate limiter number (1-15) or “disable”
<port_redirect> : Port list for copy of frames or “disable”
<mirror> : Mirror of frames: enable|disable
<logging> : System logging of frames: log|log_disable
<shutdown> : Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable
Example:
Add one ACE:
Security/Network/ACL>add 2 port 6-10 policy 3 8 ip
ACE ID 2 added last
!
!
#TO!
Edit one ACE:
Security/Network/ACL>add 1 port 1-5 policy 2 8 any
ACE ID 1 modified last
Result:
ID Type Port Policy Frame Action Rate L. Port C. Mirror Counter
-- ------- -------- -------- ----- ------ -------- -------- -------- -------
1 User 1-5 2 /0x8 Any Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled 0
2 User 6-10 3 /0x8 IP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled 0
DHCP
DHCP Snooping
Syntax:
Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode [<port_list>]
[trusted|untrusted]
Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics [<port_list>]
[clear]
Example:
Security/Network>dhcp snooping mode en
Security/Network>dhcp snooping port mode 1 tru (Port 1)
Security/Network>dhcp snooping port mode 1-10 tru (Port
1-10)
DHCP Relay
Syntax:
Security Network DHCP Relay Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Relay Server [<ip_addr>]
Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode
[enable|disable]
Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy
[replace|keep|drop]
Example:
Security/Network>dhcp relay server 192.168.2.100
Security/Network>dhcp relay mode en
(Assign one Server IP before enable the Relay mode)
Security/Network>dhcp rel info mode en
Security/Network>dhcp rel info policy keep
IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard
Configuration
Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration
Security Network IP Source Guard Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode [<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network IP Source Guard limit [<port_list>]
[<dynamic_entry_limit>|unlimited]
Security Network IP Source Guard Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_ip> <allowed_mac>
Security Network IP Source Guard Status [<port_list>]
Security Network IP Source Guard Translation
Example:
Security/Network>ip source guard mode en
Security/Network>ip source guard port mode 1-10 en (Port
1-10)
!
!
#T#!
Security/Network>ip source guard limit 1-10 2 (limit 2 MAC
Address)
IP Source Guard
Static Table
Syntax:
Security Network IP Source Guard Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_ip> <allowed_mac>
Example:
Security/Network>ip source guard entry 5 add 2
192.168.2.101 001122334455
Result:
IP Source Guard Entry Table:
Type Port VLAN IP Address MAC Address
------- ---- ---- --------------- -----------------
Static 1 1 192.168.2.10 11-22-33-44-55-66
Static 5 2 192.168.2.101 00-0b-16-21-2c-37
ARP Inspection
ARP Inspection
Syntax:
Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration
Security Network ARP Inspection Mode [enable|disable]
Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode [<port_list>]
[enable|disable]
Security Network ARP Inspection Entry [<port_list>]
add|delete <vid> <allowed_mac> <allowed_ip>
Security Network ARP Inspection Status [<port_list>]
Security Network ARP Inspection Translation
Example:
Security/Network>arp inspection mode en
Security/Network>arp inspection port mode 1-10 en
Security/Network>arp inspection entry 1 add 10
112233445566 192.168.2.10
Security/Network>arp inspection status
ARP Inspection Entry Table:
Type Port VLAN MAC Address IP Address
------- ---- ---- ----------------- -------------
Static 1 10 0b-16-21-2c-37-42 192.168.2.10
Security-AAA Configuration
Common Server
Configuration
Syntax:
Security AAA Timeout [<timeout>]
Security AAA Deadtime [<dead_time>]
RADIUS
Authentication Server
Syntax:
Security AAA RADIUS [<server_index>] [enable|disable]
[<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa radi 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 1812
!
!
#T:!
RADIUS Accounting
Server
Syntax:
Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS [<server_index>]
[enable|disable] [<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa ACCT_radi 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 1813
TACACS+
Authentication Server
Syntax:
Security AAA TACACS+ [<server_index>] [enable|disable]
[<ip_addr_string>] [<secret>] [<server_port>]
Example:
Security>aaa tacacs+ 1 en 192.168.2.200 password 49
AAA Configuration
Security>aaa con
AAA Configuration:
==================
Server Timeout : 15 seconds
Server Dead Time : 300 seconds
RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration:
===========================================
Server Mode IP Address Secret Port
------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----
1 Enabled 192.168.2.200 ******** 1812
2 Disabled 1812
3 Disabled 1812
4 Disabled 1812
5 Disabled 1812
RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration:
=======================================
Server Mode IP Address Secret Port
------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----
1 Enabled 192.168.2.200 ******** 1813
2 Disabled 1813
3 Disabled 1813
4 Disabled 1813
5 Disabled 1813
TACACS+ Authentication Server Configuration:
============================================
Server Mode IP Address Secret Port
------ -------- --------------- ------------------------------ -----
1 Enabled 192.168.2.200 ******** 49
2 Disabled 49
3 Disabled 49
4 Disabled 49
5 Disabled 49
Security>
!
5.5 Aggregation Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
!
!
#T"!
Static Aggregation Configuration
Aggregation Group
Configuration
Syntax:
Aggr Add <port_list> [<aggr_id>]
Example: Add port 5-8 to Group 1
>aggr add 5-8 1
>aggr del 1 (Delete the group 1)
Hash Code
Contributors
Syntax:
Aggr Mode [smac|dmac|ip|port] [enable|disable]
smac = Source MAC Address
dmac = Destination MAC Address
ip = IP Address
port = TCP/UDP Port Number
Example: Only the Source MAC Hash is enabled. The rest of
the modes are disabled.
>agg mode smac en
>agg mode dmac dis
>agg mode ip dis
>agg mode port dis
LACP
LACP Port
Configuration
Syntax:
LACP Configuration [<port_list>]
LACP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
LACP Key [<port_list>] [<key>]
LACP Role [<port_list>] [active|passive]
LACP Status [<port_list>]
LACP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]
Example: Configure port 5-8 to a LACP group
>lacp mode 5-8 en (Mode = Enable)
>lacp key 5-8 100 (Key = 100)
>lacp role 5-8 act (Role = Enable)
!
5.6 Loop Protection
!
Feature
Command Line
General Settings
Enable Loop
Protection
Syntax:
Loop Protect Mode [enable|disable]
Loop Protect Transmit [<transmit-time>]
Loop Protect Shutdown [<shutdown-time>]
Example:
>loop protect mode en
Transmission Time
>loop protect trans 10 (10 seconds)
!
!
#TA!
Shutdown Time
>loop protect shut 200 (200 seconds)
Port Configuration
Loop Protection - Port
Configuration
Syntax:
Loop Protect Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Loop Protect Port Action [<port_list>] [shutdown|shut_log|log]
Loop Protect Port Transmit [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
Loop/Protect>port mode 1 en
Loop/Protect>port action 1 shut_log (Shutdown Port and Log)
Loop/Protect>port transmit 1 en
!
5.7 Spanning Tree
!
Feature
Command Line
Bridge Configuration
Protocol Version
Syntax:
STP Version [<stp_version>]
Parameters:
<stp_version>: mstp|rstp|stp
Example:
STP>ver rstp
Bridge Priority
Syntax:
STP Msti Priority [<msti>] [<priority>]
Example:
STP>msti pri
MSTI# Bridge Priority
----- ---------------
CIST 32768
STP>msti pri 4096
(The available priority parameter includes: 0, 4096, 8192,
12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960,
45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)
Forward Delay
Syntax:
STP FwdDelay [<delay>]
(Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds)
Max. Age
Syntax:
STP MaxAge [<max_age>]
(Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must be
<= (FwdDelay-1)*2.)
Maximum Hop Count
Syntax:
STP MaxHops [<maxhops>]
(Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops)
Transmit Hold Count
Syntax:
STP Txhold [<holdcount>]
!
!
#TG!
(Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDUs per second.)
Advanced Setting
Syntax:
STP bpduFilter [enable|disable]
STP bpduGuard [enable|disable]
STP recovery [<timeout>]
(After recovery timeout time is set, the recovery is enabled
automatically.)
MSTI Mapping
MSTI/VLAN Mapping
Syntax:
STP Msti Add <msti> <vid-range>
Example:
STP>mst add 1 100
Add VLAN 100 to MSTI1
STP>mst map
MSTI VLANs mapped to MSTI
---- --------------------
MSTI1 100
MSTI2 No VLANs mapped
MSTI3 No VLANs mapped
MSTI4 No VLANs mapped
MSTI5 No VLANs mapped
MSTI6 No VLANs mapped
MSTI7 No VLANs mapped
Port Setting
STP Port Mode
Syntax:
STP Port Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port Edge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port AutoEdge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port P2P [<port_list>] [enable|disable|auto]
STP Port RestrictedRole [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port RestrictedTcn [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port bpduGuard [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
STP Port Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]
Example:
STP>port mode 1-24 dis (Disable STP on port 1-24)
STP>port edge 1-24 en (Enable Edge port on port 1-24)
STP>port autoedge 1-24 en (Enable Auto Edge on P1-24)
STP>port p2p 1-24 en (Enable P2P mode on P1-24)
STP>port p2p 1-24 auto (Enable Automatic P2P detection)
STP>port bpdu 1-24 en (Enable BPDUGuard on P1-24)
Port Path Cost
Syntax:
STP Msti Port Cost [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<path_cost>]
Parameters:
<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.
<path_cost>: STP port path cost (1-200000000) or 'auto'
Example: Configure CIST 0 Port Path Cost
STP>msti port cost 0 all auto (Path cost = auto)
!
!
#TK!
STP>msti port cost 0 all 100000 (Path cost = 100000)
Port Priority
Syntax:
STP Msti Port Priority [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<priority>]
Parameters:
<msti> : STP bridge instance no (0-7, CIST=0, MSTI1=1, ...)
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.
<priority> : STP port priority (0/16/32/48/.../224/240)
Example: Configure CIST 0 Port Priority
STP Msti Port Priority [<msti>] [<port_list>] [<priority>]
STP>msti port priority 0 5 240 (Port 5 Priority = 240)
STP>msti port priority 0 all 128 (All Ports' priority = 128)
Example: Configure MSTI 1 Port Priority
STP>msti port priority 1 5 240 (MSTI1 port 5 priority=240)
!
5.8 MVR
!
Feature
Command Line
MVR Configuration
MVR Mode
Syntax:
MVR Mode [enable|disable]
MVR - VLAN
Interface Setting
Syntax:
MVR VLAN Setup [<mvid>] [add|del|upd] [(Name
<mvr_name>)]
Example: MVR VLAN 2, MVR Name = Source2
MVR>vlan setup 2 add Name Source2
MVR - Port Role
Syntax:
MVR VLAN Port [<vid>|<mvr_name>] [<port_list>]
[source|receiver|inactive]
Example: Port 2 = Source Port, Port 6-7 = Receiver Port
MVR>vlan port 2 2 source
MVR>vlan port 2 6-7 rec
Immediately Leave
Syntax:
MVR Immediate Leave [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
MVR>immedi leave 1-10 en
MVR Configuration
MVR>conf (View the settings of above configuration)
MVR Configuration:
==================
MVR Mode: Enabled
MVR Interface Setting
VID Name Mode Tagging Priority LLQI
---- -------------------------------- ---------- -------- -------- -----
2 Source2 Dynamic Tagged 0 5
[Port Setting of Source2(VID-2)]
Source Port : 2
Receiver Port: 6,7
!
!
#TT!
Inactive Port: 1,3-5,8-26
[Channel Setting of Source2(VID-2)]
<Empty Channel Table>
MVR Immediate Leave Setting
Port Immediate Leave
---- ---------------
1 Enabled
2 Enabled
3 Enabled
4 Enabled
5 Enabled
6 Enabled
7 Enabled
8 Enabled
9 Enabled
10 Enabled
11 Disabled
12 Disabled
!
5.9 IPMC
!
Feature
Command Line
IGMP Snooping Configuration
IGMP Snooping
Enable
Syntax:
IPMC Mode [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
IPMC>mode igmp en
Unregistered IPMCv4
Flooding Enabled
Syntax:
IPMC Flooding [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
IPMC>flood igmp en
IGMP SSM Range
(Source-Specific
Multicast)
Syntax:
IPMC SSM [mld|igmp] [(Range <prefix> <mask_len>)]
Example:
IPMC>ssm igmp range 239.0.0.0 8
(Range from 239.0.0.0, mask length=8)
Leave Proxy Enable
Syntax:
IPMC Leave Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
IPMC>leave proxy igmp en (Enable)
IPMC>leave proxy igmp dis (Disable)
Proxy Enable
Syntax:
IPMC Proxy [mld|igmp] [enable|disable]
Example:
IPMC>proxy igmp en (Enable)
IPMC>proxy igmp dis (Disable)
Port Related
Syntax:
!
!
#T1!
Configuration
(Router Port, Fast
Leave, Throttling)
IPMC Router [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Fastleave [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Throttling [mld|igmp] [<port_list>] [limit_group_number]
Example:
IPMC>router igmp 25-26 en (Port 25-26 are router ports)
IPMC>Fast igmp 1-24 en (Enable IGMP Fast Leave on P1-24)
IPMC>thro igmp 1-2 5 (Throtting of Port 1, 2 is 5 groups.)
VLAN Configuration
Syntax:
IPMC State [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Querier [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [enable|disable]
IPMC Compatibility [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [auto|v1|v2|v3]
IPMC Parameter RV [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_rv]
IPMC Parameter QI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qi]
IPMC Parameter QRI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_qri]
IPMC Parameter LLQI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_llqi]
IPMC Parameter URI [mld|igmp] [<vid>] [ipmc_param_uri]
Example:
IPMC>state igmp 2 en (Enable IGMP Snooping on VLAN 2)
IPMC>quer igmp 2 en (Enable IGMP Querier on VLAN 2)
IPMC>compa igmp 2 v2 (Enable IGMPv2 on VLAN 2)
MLD Snooping
MLD Snooping
Note: MLD Snooping is applied to IPv6 Multicast. The
commands are the same as the above IGMP Snooping (IPv4)
Commands. Just choose mld instead of igmp when seeing
[mld|igmp] in the syntax. The IP Address should be IPv6
format.
!
5.10 LLDP Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
LLDP Parameters
LLDP Timers
Syntax:
LLDP Interval [<interval>]
LLDP Hold [<hold>]
LLDP Delay [<delay>]
LLDP Reinit [<reinit>]
Example:
LLDP>interval 30
LLDP>hold 4
LLDP>delay 2
LLDP>reini 2
LLDP Mode
Syntax:
LLDP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]
(rx=RX Only, tx=TX Only)
Example: Enable LLDP on Ports
!
!
#T>!
LLDP>mode 1-10 en (Port 1-10 are enabled)
LLDP>mode 1-26 en (Port 1-26 are enabled)
CDP aware
Syntax:
LLDP cdp_aware [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example: Enable CDP on Port 1-5
LLDP>cdp_a 1-5 en (CDP on Port 1-5 are enabled)
LLDP Optional_TLV
Parameters
Syntax:
LLDP optional_TLV [<port_list>]
[port_descr|sys_name|sys_descr|sys_capa|mgmt_addr]
[enable|disable]
Example:
LLDP>option 1-3 port en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_name en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_desc en
LLDP>option 1-3 sys_capa en
LLDP>option 1-3 mgmt_add en
!
5.11 Power over Ethernet Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
PoE Configuration
PoE Configuration
Syntax:
PoE Mgmt_mode
[class_con|class_res|al_con|al_res|lldp_res|lldp_con]
Parameters:
class_con : Class + Actual Consumption
class_res : Class + Reserved Power
al_con : Allocation + Actual Consumption
al_res : Allocation + Reserved Power
lldp_con : LLDP-MED + Actual Consumption
lldp_res : LLDP-MED + Reserved Power
Example:
PoE>mgmt class_con
PoE Power Supply
Configuration
(Warning: The default
value is for reference
only. If the value is
not conducive to your
product specification,
enter the correct
value before you start
using PoE function.)
Syntax:
PoE Maximum_Power [<port_list>] [<port_power>]
Parameters:
<port_list> : Port list or “all”; default: All ports
<port_power>: PoE maximum power for the port (0-15.4 W for
PoE mode, 0-30.0 W for PoE+ mode)
Example:
PoE>max 1-24 10 (Max. power of Port 1-24 to 10 W)
PoE>max 1-24 15.4 (Max. power of Port 1-24 to 15.4 W)
PoE Port
Configuration
Syntax:
PoE Mode [<port_list>] [disabled|poe|poe+]
Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports
disables : Disable PoE
poe: Enables PoE IEEE 802.3af (Class 4 limited to 15.4W)
poe+: Enables PoE+ IEEE 802.3at (Class 4 limited to 30W)
(default: Show PoE's mode)
Example: Set Port 1-24 ro PoE+ mode
!
!
#1O!
PoE>mode 1-24 poe+
PoE Status
Primary Power Supply
PoE>prim
Primary Power Supply
---------------------
200 [W]
Port Status
PoE>sta
Port PD Class Port Status Power Used [W] Current Used [mA]
---- -------- --------------------------------------- -------------- ------- ----------
1 - No PD detected 0.0 0
2 - No PD detected 0.0 0
!
5.12 MAC Address Table Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
MAC Address Table Configuration
Aging Time
Configuration
Syntax:
MAC Agetime [<age_time>]
Parameters:
<age_time>: MAC address age time (0,10-1000000)
0=disable
Example:
MAC>age 100 (change aging time to 100 seconds, the aging
time range is 10-1000000)
MAC>age 0 (0 = Disable Aging time)
MAC Learning
Configuration
Syntax:
MAC Learning [<port_list>] [auto|disable|secure]
Example:
MAC>lear 1-8 sec
MAC>lear 9-12 dis
MAC>learn 1-12 auto
Static MAC Table
Syntax:
MAC Add <mac_addr> <port_list> [<vid>]
Example:
MAC>add 0b16212c3742 1-5 1 (This type will be changed to
hexadecimal automatically.)
MAC>add 0b-16-21-2c-37-42 1-10 1 (This type is
hexadecimal; it will not be changed.)
Result:
Non-volatile static:
VID MAC Address Ports
!
!
#1#!
--- ----------------- -----
1 00-10-15-02-25-2a 1-5
1 0b-16-21-2c-37-42 1-10
!
5.13 VLAN Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
VLAN Configuration
VLAN Membership
Syntax:
VLAN Add <vid>|<name> [<ports_list>]
VLAN Name Add <name> <vid>
Example:
VLAN>add 3 5-8 (Add port 5-8 to VLAN 3)
VLAN>name add vlan3 3 (vlan3 is the name of VLAN 3)
Port Configuration
Syntax:
VLAN FrameType [<port_list>] [all|tagged|untagged]
VLAN IngressFilter [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
VLAN tx_tag [<port_list>] [untag_pvid|untag_all|tag_all]
VLAN PortType [<port_list>]
[unaware|c-port|s-port|s-custom-port]
Example:
VLAN>framety 1-3 all
VLAN>ingr 1-3 en
VLAN>tx_t 1-3 untag_pvid
VLAN>portty 1-3 un
!
5.14 Private VLAN Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
PVLAN Configuration
PVLAN Configuration
Syntax:
PVLAN Configuration [<port_list>]
PVLAN Add <pvlan_id> [<port_list>]
PVLAN Delete <pvlan_id>
PVLAN Lookup [<pvlan_id>]
PVLAN Isolate [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Example:
PVLAN>add 10 9-12
PVLAN>add 10 1-2
PVLAN>add 20 1-2
PVLAN>add 20 13-18
PVLAN>iso 9-18 en (Enable Isolated Ports)
Result:
PVLAN ID Ports
-------- -----
1 1-8,17-26
10 1,2
20 13-18
!
!
#1:!
!
5.15 VCL Configuration
Feature
Command Line
MAC-based VLAN Configuration
MAC-based VLAN
Configuration
Syntax:
VCL Macvlan Add <mac_addr> <vid> [<port_list>]
Example:
VCL/Macvlan>add 001122334455 10 1-4
Result:
VCL/Macvlan>conf
MAC Address VID Ports
----------------- ---- -----
00-0b-16-21-2c-37 10 1-4
Protocol-based VLAN Configuration
Protocol to Group
Syntax:
VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 <ether_type>|arp|ip|ipx|at
<group_id>
Example:
VCL/ProtoVlan>protocol add Eth2 0x0808 E4
Group to VLAN
Syntax:
VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add [<port_list>] <group_id> <vid>
Example:
VCL/ProtoVlan>vlan add 1-8 E4 10
Protocol VLAN
Configuration
Result:
VCL/ProtoVlan>conf
Protocol Type Protocol (Value) Group ID
------------- ------------------------ --------
EthernetII ETYPE:0x808 E4
LLC_Other DSAP:0xff; SSAP:0xff L3
LLC_SNAP OUI-00:e0:2b; PID:0x1 S2
EthernetII ETYPE:0x800 E1
Group ID VID Ports
---------------- ---- -----
E4 10 1-8
E1 10 5-8
IP Subnet-based VLAN Configuration
IP Subnet-based
VLAN Configuration
Syntax:
VCL IPVlan Add [<vce_id>] <ip_addr_mask> <vid>
[<port_list>]
Parameters:
<vce_id> : Unique VCE ID for each VCL entry
<ip_addr_mask>: Source IP address and mask (Format:
a.b.c.d/n).
<vid> : VLAN ID (1-4095)
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports
Example:
!
!
#1"!
VCL/IPVlan>add 1 192.168.10.0/24 10 1-10
Result:
VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VID Ports
------ --------------- ----------- ---- -----
1 192.168.10.0 24 10 1-10
!
5.16 Voice VLAN Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
Voice VLAN Configuration
Voice VLAN
Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN Mode [enable|disable]
Voice VLAN ID [<vid>]
Voice VLAN Agetime [<age_time>]
Voice VLAN Traffic Class [<class>]
Example:
Voice>vlan mode en
Voice>vlan id 100
Voice>vlan age 86400
Voice>vlan traff class 7
Result:
Voice VLAN Configuration:
=========================
Voice VLAN Mode : Enabled
Voice VLAN VLAN ID : 100
Voice VLAN Age Time(seconds) : 86400
Voice VLAN Traffic Class : 7
Port Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN Port Mode [<port_list>] [disable|auto|force]
Voice VLAN Security [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Voice VLAN Discovery Protocol [<port_list>] [oui|lldp|both]
Example:
Voice/VLAN>port mode 1-4 auto
Voice/VLAN>security 1-4 en
Voice/VLAN>disco pro 1-4 both
Result:
Voice VLAN Port Configuration:
==============================
Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol
---- -------- -------- ------------------
1 Auto Enabled Both
2 Auto Enabled Both
3 Auto Enabled Both
4 Auto Enabled Both
OUI Configuration
Syntax:
Voice VLAN OUI Add <oui_addr> [<description>]
Voice VLAN OUI Delete <oui_addr>
Voice VLAN OUI Clear
Voice VLAN OUI Lookup [<oui_addr>]
Example:
Voice/VLAN>oui add 00-12-08 hello
Result:
!
!
#1A!
Voice/VLAN>oui lookup
Voice VLAN OUI Table:
=====================
Telephony OUI Description
------------- -----------
00-01-E3 Siemens AG phones
00-03-6B Cisco phones
00-0F-E2 H3C phones
00-60-B9 Philips and NEC AG phones
00-D0-1E Pingtel phones
00-E0-75 Polycom phones
00-E0-BB 3Com phones
00-12-77 e10
00-12-08 hello
!
!
!
5.17 QoS Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
QoS Configuration
Port
Classification
Syntax:
QoS Port Classification Class [<port_list>] [<class>]
QoS Port Classification DPL [<port_list>] [<dpl>]
QoS Port Classification PCP [<port_list>] [<pcp>]
QoS Port Classification DEI [<port_list>] [<dei>]
QoS Port Classification Tag [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Classification Map [<port_list>] [<pcp_list>] [<dei_list>]
[<class>] [<dpl>]
QoS Port Classification DSCP [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
Range of the Value:
<class>: QoS class (0-7)
<dpl>: Drop Precedence Level (0-1)
<pcp>: Priority Code Point (0-7)
<dei>: Drop Eligible Indicator (0-1)
Example:
QoS/Port/Classification>clas 1-2 7
QoS/Port/Classification>dpl 1-2 1
QoS/Port/Classification>pcp 1-2 7
QoS/Port/Classification>dei 1-2 1
QoS/Port/Classification>tag 1-2 en
QoS/Port/Classification>dscp 1-2 en
QoS Ingress Port
Tag
Classification
Syntax:
QoS Port Classification Map [<port_list>] [<pcp_list>] [<dei_list>]
[<class>] [<dpl>]
Port Policing
Syntax:
QoS Port Policer Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Policer Rate [<port_list>] [<rate>]
QoS Port Policer Unit [<port_list>] [kbps|fps]
QoS Port Policer FlowControl [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
<rate> : Rate in kbps or fps (100-3300000)
Example:
!
!
#1G!
QoS/Port/Policer>mode 1-2 en
QoS/Port/Policer>rate 1-2 300
QoS/Port/Policer>unit 1-2 kbps
QoS/Port/Policer>flow 1-2 en
Port Scheduler
Syntax:
Syntax:
QoS Port Scheduler Mode [<port_list>] [strict|weighted]
Example:
QoS/Port/Scheduler>mode 1-2 stric (Strict Priority)
QoS/Port/Scheduler>mode 1-2 wei (Weighted)
QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers
QoS/Port/Scheduler>wei 1-2 1 30 (Port 1-2, Q1=30)
QoS/Port/Scheduler>wei 1-2 2 30 (Port 1-2, Q2=30)
Port Shaping
Syntax:
Port Shaper:
QoS Port Shaper Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port Shaper Rate [<port_list>] [<bit_rate>]
Queue Shaper:
QoS Port QueueShaper Mode [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[enable|disable]
QoS Port QueueShaper Rate [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[<bit_rate>]
QoS Port QueueShaper Excess [<port_list>] [<queue_list>]
[enable|disable]
Parameters:
<port_list>: Port list or “all”; default: All ports
<bit_rate> : Rate in kilo bits per second (100-3300000)
Example:
QoS/Port/Shaper>rate 1-2 1000
QoS/Port/QueueShaper>mode 1-2 all en (Queue Shaper)
QoS/Port/QueueShaper>rate 1-2 all 600 (Queue Shaper)
!
!
#1K!
DSCP
Configuration
Syntax:
QoS Port DSCP Translation [<port_list>] [enable|disable]
QoS Port DSCP Classification [<port_list>] [none|zero|selected|all]
QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark [<port_list>]
[disable|enable|remap_dp_unaware|remap_dp_aware]
Note: DSCP is an advanced QoS setting. Follow the DSCP table of
upper access/core switch to configure the table. The table of the
whole network must be unified.
Storm Configuration
Storm Control
Syntax:
QoS Storm Unicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
QoS Storm Multicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
QoS Storm Broadcast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]
<packet_rate>: Rate in fps (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1k,
2k, 4k, 8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 256k, 512k, 1024k, 2048k, 4096k,
8192k, 16384k, 32768k)
Example:
QoS/Storm>unic en 32768k
QoS/Storm>multi en 4096k
QoS/Storm>broad en 4k
!
!
5.18 Mirroring Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
Mirroring Configuration
Mirror Configuration
Syntax:
Mirror Port [<port>|disable]
Mirror Mode [<port_cpu_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]
Example:
Mirror>port 5
Mirror>mode 6-8 en
Result:
Mirror Configuration:
=====================
Mirror Port: 5
Port Mode
---- --------
1 Disabled
2 Disabled
3 Disabled
4 Disabled
5 Disabled
6 Enabled
7 Enabled
8 Enabled
!
!
#1T!
!
5.19 UPnP Configuration
Feature
Command Line
UPnP Configuration
UPnp Configuration
Syntax:
UPnP Configuration
UPnP Mode [enable|disable]
UPnP TTL [<ttl>]
UPnP AdvertisingDuration [<duration>]
Example:
UPnP>mode en
UPnP>ttl 5 (Default=4)
UPnP>adver 200 (Default=100)
Result:
UPnP Configuration:
===================
UPnP Mode : Enabled
UPnP TTL : 5
UPnP Advertising Duration : 200
!
!
5.20 sFlow Configuration
!
Feature
Command Line
sFlow Configuration
Receiver
Configuration
Syntax:
sFlow Receiver [release] [<timeout>] [<ip_addr_host>]
[<udp_port>] [<datagram_size>]
Example:
sFlow>receiver 10 192.168.2.100 6343 1400
Result:
Receiver Configuration:
=======================
Owner : <none>
Receiver : 192.168.2.100
UDP Port : 6343
Max. Datagram: 1400 bytes
Time left : 0 seconds
Receiver Release
sFlow>receiver
Port Configuration
Syntax:
sFlow Receiver [release] [<timeout>] [<ip_addr_host>]
[<udp_port>] [<datagram_size>]
sFlow FlowSampler [<port_list>] [<sampling_rate>]
[<max_hdr_size>]
sFlow CounterPoller [<port_list>] [<interval>]
sFlow Statistics Receiver [clear]
sFlow Statistics Samplers [<port_list>] [clear]
Example:
!
!
#11!
sFlow>flow 1-2 10 128 (Enable FlowSample on port 1-2,
rate=10, max. size=128)
sFlow>coun 1-2 5 (Enable CounterPoller of port 1-2, and
set interval to 5)
sFlow>statistic sample 1-2
Per-Port Statistics:
====================
Port Rx Flow Samples Tx Flow Samples Counter Samples
---- --------------- --------------- ---------------
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
!
!
5.21 Diagnostic Commands
Feature
Command Line
Ping
Ping Test
Syntax:
IP Ping <ip_addr_string> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count
<ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Parameters:
<ip_addr_string>: IPv4 host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name
string
length : PING Length keyword
<ping_length> : Ping ICMP data length (2-1452; Default is
56), excluding MAC,
IP and ICMP headers
count : PING Count keyword
<ping_count> : Transmit ECHO_REQUEST packet count
(1-60; Default is 5)
interval : PING Interval keyword
<ping_interval> : Ping interval (0-30; Default is 0)
Example: Ping IP 192.168.2.100
IP>ping 192.168.2.100
PING server 192.168.2.100, 56 bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
IPv6 Ping Test
Syntax:
IP IPv6 Ping6 <ipv6_addr> [(Length <ping_length>)] [(Count
<ping_count>)] [(Interval <ping_interval>)]
Example:
poeswitch:/IP>ipv6 ping6 2001:DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800
VeriPHY
Syntax:
Port VeriPHY [<port_list>]
Example:
!
!
#1>!
Port>veriphy 24
Starting VeriPHY, please wait
Port Pair A Length Pair B Length Pair C Length Pair D Length
----- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------
24 OK 0 OK 0 OK 0 OK 0
!
5.22 Maintenance Commands
Feature
Command Line
Maintenance Commands
Restart Device
Syntax:
System Reboot
Example:
System>reb
System will reboot in a few seconds
Factory Defaults
Syntax:
System Restore Default [keep_ip]
Example:
Software/Firmware
(Firmware Version,
Firmware Swapping,
Firmware Update)
Syntax:
Firmware Information
Firmware Swap
Firmware Load <ip_addr_string> <file_name>
Parameters of Firmware Load:
<ip_addr_string>: IP host address (a.b.c.d) or a host name
string
<file_name> : Firmware file name
Example:
Firmware Swapping
Firmware>sw
... Erase from 0x40fd0000-0x40fdffff: .
... Program from 0x87ff0000-0x88000000 to 0x40fd0000: .
... Program from 0x87ff000a-0x87ff000c to 0x40fd000a: .
Alternate image activated, now rebooting.
Firmware Update
Firmware>load 192.168.2.100 SMBStaX.dat
Downloaded "SMBStaX.dat"; 3415213 bytes
Master initiated software updating starting
Waiting for firmware update to complete
Starting flash update - do not power off device!
Erasing image...
Programming image...
Note 1:
The switch processes the firmware upgrading through the
TFTP protocol. When running firmware upgrading, open the
TFTP tool as the TFTP server for the switch.
For example: TFTPd32 is a freeware TFTP server you can
download from the Internet. Browse the directory of the
firmware file and select the correct server interface.
If you failed to upload the file, remember to shut down the
firewall of your computer. The process may be terminated by
your firewall.
!
!
#>O!
Note 2: While the firmware uploading process is started,
don't shut down the switch!
!
!
!
!
!
!
6. Web Configuration - Monitor, Diagnostic, Maintenance
6.1 Monitor
6.1.1 Monitor / System
6.1.1.1 Monitor / System / Information
The switch system information is provided here.
Contact
The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.
Name
The system name configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Name.
Location
The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Location.
MAC Address
The MAC Address of this switch.
Chip ID
The Chip ID of this switch.
System Date
The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the configured NTP
Server, if any.
!
!
#>:!
System Uptime
The period of time the device has been operational.
Software Version
The software version of this switch.
Software Date
The date when the switch software was produced.
Buttons
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh : Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
!
6.1.1.2 CPU Load
This page displays the CPU load, using an SVG graph.
The load is measured as averaged over the last 100 ms, 1 sec and 10 second intervals. The last 120
samples are graphed, and the last numbers are displayed as text, as well.
In order to display the SVG graph, your browser must support the SVG format. Consult the SVG Wiki
for more information on browser support. Specifically, at the time of this writing, Microsoft Internet
Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG.
Buttons:
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
6.1.1.3 System Log Information
The switch system log information is provided here.
!
!
#>"!
ID
The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
Level
The level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:
Info: Information level of the system log.
Warning: Warning level of the system log.
Error: Error level of the system log.
All: All levels.
Time
The time of the system log entry.
Message
The message of the system log entry.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Updates the system log entries, starting from the current entry ID.
Clear: Flushes all system log entries.
|<<: Updates the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.
<<: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.
>>: Updates the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently displayed.
>>|: Updates the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.
!
!
#>A!
6.1.1.4 System / Detailed Log
The switch detailed log information is provided here.
ID
The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.
Message
The detailed message of the system log entry.
Buttons!
Refresh : Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.
/<<: Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.
<<: Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.
>>: Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.
>>/: Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.
!
!
#>G!
!
6.1.2 Monitor / Port State
6.1.2.1 Port State
This page provides an overview of the current switch port states.
The port states are illustrated as follows:
RJ45 ports
SFP ports
State
Disabled
Down
Link
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs at
regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
!
!
#>K!
!
6.1.2.2 Traffic Overview
This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports.
The displayed counters:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Packets
The number of received and transmitted packets per port.
Bytes
The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.
Errors
The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port.
Drops
The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.
Filtered
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for all ports.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
#>T!
!
6.1.2.3 QoS Statistics
This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports.
The displayed counters:
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Qn
There are eight QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.
Rx/Tx
The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for all ports.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
#>1!
!
6.1.2.4 QCL Status
This page shows the QCL status of different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It
is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum
number of QCEs is 256 on each switch.
User
Indicates the QCL user.
QCE#
Indicates the index of QCE.
Frame Type
Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames. Possible frame types:
Any: The QCE will match all frame type.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.
IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.
IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.
Port
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.
Action
Indicates the classification action taken on an ingress frame if the parameters configured are matched
with the frame's content.
There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.
Class: Classified QoS class; if a frame matches the QCE, it will be put in the queue.
!
!
#>>!
DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE, then the DP level will set to the value
displayed in the DPL column.
DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE, then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed in the DSCP
column.
Conflict
Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. As H/W resources are shared by multiple applications, it may
happen that resources required to add a QCE may not be available. In that case, it shows conflict
status as “Yes”; otherwise it is always “No.” Note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W
resources required to add a QCL entry by clicking “Resolve Conflict.”
Buttons!
: Select the QCL status from this drop-down list.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs at
regular intervals.
Resolve Conflict: Click to release the resources required to add a QCL entry in case the conflict status
for any QCL entry is “Yes.”
Refresh: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.
!
!
:OO!
6.1.2.5 Detailed Port Statistics
This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select
which switch port details to display.
The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and
transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit.
Receive Total and Transmit Total
Rx and Tx Packets
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets.
Rx and Tx Octets
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but excludes framing
bits.
Rx and Tx Unicast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.
Rx and Tx Multicast
!
!
:O#!
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.
Rx and Tx Broadcast
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.
Rx and Tx Pause
A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating
a PAUSE operation.
Receive!and!Transmit!Size!Counters!
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their
respective frame sizes.
Receive!and!Transmit!Queue!Counters!
The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.
Receive!Error!Counters!
Rx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.
Rx CRC/Alignment
The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.
Rx Undersize
The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Oversize
The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.
Rx Fragments
The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Jabber
The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC.
Rx Filtered
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.
!
!
:O:!
2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this
port.
Transmit!Error!Counters!
Tx Drops
The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.
Tx Late/Exc. Coll.
The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.
Buttons!
The port select box determines which port is affected by clicking the buttons.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for the selected port.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
!
!
!
:O"!
!
6.1. 3 Monitor / Security
6.1.3.1 Security / Access Management Statistics
This page provides statistics for access management.
Interface
The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch.
Received Packets
Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.
Allowed Packets
Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.
Discarded Packets
Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clear all statistics.
!
!
!
:OA!
!
6.1.3.2 Security / Network
Port Security Switch Status
This page shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct configuration.
Configuration comes indirectly from other modules — the user modules. When a user module has
enabled port security on a port, the port is set up for software-based learning. In this mode, frames from
unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules
whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the
forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to
forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.
The status page is divided into two sections: one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual
port status.
User Module Legend
The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.
User Module Name
The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.
Abbr
A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the port status table.
!
!
:OG!
Port Status
The table has one row for each port on the switch and a number of columns:
Port
The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for this particular
port.
Users
Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or
not. A dash / hyphen (-) means that the corresponding user module is not enabled, whereas a letter
indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter (see Abbr) has enabled port security.
State
Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:
Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.
Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting frames from
unknown MAC addresses to arrive.
Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that
module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in.
Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module, and that
module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is
administratively re-opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page.
MAC Count (Current, Limit)
The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding as well as
blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port, respectively.
If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).
If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port, the Limit column will show a dash (-).
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:OK!
Port Security Port Status
This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a module
with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules: the user modules.
When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set up for software-based learning.
In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module, which in
turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it. For a MAC
address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing
the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module
decides otherwise.
MAC Address & VLAN ID
The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, a single
row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.
State
Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked state, it will
not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.
Time of Addition
Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.
Age/Hold
If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked state until
the hold time (measured in seconds) expires. If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC
address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC
address still forwards traffic. If the age period (measured in seconds) expires and no frames have been
seen, the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table. Otherwise, a new age period will begin.
!
!
:OT!
If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a dash (-) will
be shown.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
Security / Network / NAS
This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states.
Port
The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.
Admin State
The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
Port State
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states.
Last Source
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based
authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
Last ID
!
!
:O1!
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL
frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the most recently received
frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.
QoS Class
QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.
Port VLAN ID
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by
NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about Guest
VLANs here.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Port State
Admin State
The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values.
Port State
The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port state for a description of the individual states.
QoS Class
The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned.
Port VLAN ID
The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by
NAS.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the VLAN ID.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more about Guest
VLANs here.
!
!
:O>!
Port Counters
EAPOL Counters
These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:
• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
EAPOL Counters
Direction
Name
IEEE Name
Description
Rx
Total
dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL frames
of any type that have been received
by the switch.
Rx
Response
ID
dot1xAuthEapolRespIdFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL
Response Identity frames that have
been received by the switch.
Rx
Responses
dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL
response frames (other than
Response Identity frames) that have
been received by the switch.
Rx
Start
dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx
The number of EAPOL Start frames
that have been received by the
switch.
Rx
Logoff
dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx
The number of valid EAPOL Logoff
frames that have been received by
the switch.
Rx
Invalid
Type
dot1xAuthInvalidEapolFramesRx
The number of EAPOL frames that
have been received by the switch in
which the frame type is not
recognized.
Rx
Invalid
Length
dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx
The number of EAPOL frames that
have been received by the switch in
which the Packet Body Length field
is invalid.
Tx
Total
dot1xAuthEapolFramesTx
The number of EAPOL frames of
any type that have been transmitted
!
!
:#O!
by the switch.
Tx
Request ID
dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFramesTx
The number of EAPOL Request
Identity frames that have been
transmitted by the switch.
Tx
Requests
dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx
The number of valid EAPOL
Request frames (other than Request
Identity frames) that have been
transmitted by the switch.
Backend Server Counters
These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative states:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Backend Server Counters
Direction
Name
IEEE Name
Description
Rx
Access
Challenges
dot1xAuthBackendAccessChallenges
802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives the first
request from the
backend server
following the first
response from the
supplicant. Indicates
that the backend
server has
communication with
the switch.
MAC-based:
Counts all Access
Challenges received
from the backend
server for this port
(left-most table) or
!
!
:##!
client (right-most
table).
Rx
Other
Requests
dot1xAuthBackendOtherRequestsToSupplicant
802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
sends an EAP
Request packet
following the first to
the supplicant.
Indicates that the
backend server chose
an EAP-method.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Rx
Auth.
Successes
dot1xAuthBackendAuthSuccesses
802.1X- and
MAC-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives a success
indication. Indicates
that the supplicant/
client has successfully
authenticated to the
backend server.
Rx
Auth.
Failures
dot1xAuthBackendAuthFails
802.1X- and
MAC-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
receives a failure
message. This
indicates that the
supplicant/client has
not authenticated to
the backend server.
Tx
Responses
dot1xAuthBackendResponses
802.1X-based:
Counts the number of
times that the switch
attempts to send a
!
!
:#:!
supplicant's first
response packet to
the backend server.
Indicates the switch
attempted
communication with
the backend server.
Possible
retransmissions are
not counted.
MAC-based:
Counts all the
backend server
packets sent from the
switch towards the
backend server for a
given port (left-most
table) or client
(right-most table).
Possible
retransmissions are
not counted.
Last Supplicant/Client Info
Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This information is available
for the following administrative states:
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
Last Supplicant/Client Info
Name
IEEE Name
Description
MAC
Address
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameSource
The MAC address of the last supplicant/client.
VLAN ID
-
The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the last
supplicant/client was received.
!
!
:#"!
Version
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameVersion
802.1X-based:
The protocol version number carried in the most
recently received EAPOL frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Identity
-
802.1X-based:
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the
most recently received Response Identity EAPOL
frame.
MAC-based:
Not applicable.
Selected Counters
Selected Counters
The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.
The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be empty if no MAC
address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the attached MAC Addresses from
the table below.
Attached!MAC!Addresses!
Identity
Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame.
Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the
Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No supplicants attached.
This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.
MAC Address
For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.
For MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.
Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters
table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.
VLAN ID
This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port
!
!
:#A!
Security module.
State
The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state, it is allowed to
forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is blocked. As long as the backend
server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it is unauthenticated. If an authentication fails for
one or the other reason, the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.
Last Authentication
Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as unsuccessful).
Buttons!
The port select box determines which port is affected when clicking the buttons.
Auto-refresh
Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Click to refresh the page immediately.
This button is available in the following modes:
• Force Authorized
• Force Unauthorized
• Port-based 802.1X
• Single 802.1X
Click to clear the counters for the selected port.
This button is available in the following modes:
• Multi 802.1X
!
!
:#G!
• MAC-based Auth.X
Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client's counters. The "Last Client" will not
be cleared, however.
This button is available in the following modes:
• Multi 802.1X
• MAC-based Auth.X
Click to clear only the currently selected client's counters.
!
!
!
Network / ACL Status
This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. It
is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum
number of ACEs is 256 on each switch.
User
Indicates the ACL user.
Ingress Port
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values:
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.
Frame Type
!
!
:#K!
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values:
Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get
matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
Action
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Rate Limiter
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is displayed,
the rate limiter operation is disabled.
Port Copy
Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number.
The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When Disabled is displayed, the port copy
operation is disabled.
Mirror
Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values:
Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled."
CPU
Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
CPU Once
Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.
Counter
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
!
!
:#T!
Conflict
Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due
to hardware limitations.
Buttons
: Select the ACL status from this drop-down list.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
DHCP Snooping Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP
snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled. And it doesn't count the DHCP packets for
DHCP client.
Receive and Transmit Packets
Rx and Tx Discover
The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Offer
The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Request
The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.
!
!
:#1!
Rx and Tx Decline
The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx ACK
The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx NAK
The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Release
The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Inform
The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Query
The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned
The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Unknown
The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and transmitted.
Rx and Tx Lease Active
The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and transmitted.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for the selected port.
!
!
:#>!
DHCP Relay Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.
Server Statistics
Transmit to Server
The number of packets that are relayed from client to server.
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients.
Receive from Server
The number of packets received from server.
Receive Missing Agent Option
The number of packets received without agent information options.
Receive Missing Circuit ID
The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.
Receive Missing Remote ID
The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.
Receive Bad Circuit ID
The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match a known circuit ID.
!
!
::O!
Receive Bad Remote ID
The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match a known Remote ID.
Client Statistics
Transmit to Client
The number of relayed packets from server to client.
Transmit Error
The number of packets that resulted in an error while being sent to servers.
Receive from Client
The number of received packets from server.
Receive Agent Option
The number of received packets with relay agent information option.
Replace Agent Option
The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option.
Keep Agent Option
The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained.
Drop Agent Option
The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears statistics.
Network!/ Dynamic!ARP!Inspection!Table!
Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP Inspection
Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by MAC address,
and then by IP address.
Navigating the ARP Inspection Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, the default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first
!
!
::#!
20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
The "Start from port address," "VLAN," "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to
select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the button will update the
displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match. In addition,
the two input fields will — upon a button click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing
for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The last entry of the currently displayed table is used as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
ARP Inspection Table Columns
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.
MAC Address
User MAC address of the entry.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Flushes all dynamic entries.
/<< : Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Tables.
>> : Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
!
:::!
!
Network!/ Dynamic!IP!Source!Guard!Table!
Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic IP Source Guard
Table is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and then by MAC address.
Navigating the IP Source Guard Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.
The "Start from port address," "VLAN" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to select the starting
point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting
from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match. In addition, the two input fields
will — upon a button click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous
refresh with the same start address.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end
is reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
IP Source Guard Table Columns
Port
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.
IP Address
User IP address of the entry.
MAC Address
!
!
::"!
Source MAC address.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Flushes all dynamic entries.
/<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Tables.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
6.1.3.3 Security / AAA
This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication
configuration page.
RADIUS Authentication Servers
#
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this server.
State
The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready
!
!
::A!
to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the
configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the
dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This
state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
RADIUS!Accounting!Servers!
#
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.
IP Address
The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this server.
State
The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module is ready
to accept accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the
configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the
dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses. This
state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
!
!
!
!
::G!
!
RADIUS!Authentication!Statistics
This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server.
RADIUS Authentication Statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668-RADIUS.Authentication Client MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details.
Packet Counters
RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit counters.
Direction
Name
RFC4668 Name
Description
Rx
Access Accepts
radiusAuthClientExtAccess
Accepts
The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets
(valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx
Access Rejects
radiusAuthClientExtAccess
Rejects
The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets
(valid or invalid) received from the server.
Rx
Access
Challenges
radiusAuthClientExtAcc
essChallenges
The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge
packets (valid or invalid) received from the
server.
Rx
Malformed
Access
Responses
radiusAuthClientExtMalf
ormedAccessResponse
s
The number of malformed RADIUS
Access-Response packets received from
the server. Malformed packets include
packets with an invalid length. Bad
!
!
::K!
authenticators or Message Authenticator
attributes or unknown types are not included
as malformed access responses.
Rx
Bad
Authenticators
radiusAuthClientExtBad
Authenticators
The number of RADIUS Access-Response
packets containing invalid authenticators or
Message Authenticator attributes received
from the server.
Rx
Unknown Types
radiusAuthClientExtUnk
nownTypes
The number of RADIUS packets that were
received with unknown types from the server
on the authentication port and dropped.
Rx
Packets Dropped
Radius Auth Client
Ext-Packets Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets that were
received from the server on the
authentication port and dropped for some
other reason.
Tx
Access Requests
Radius
AuthClientExtAccess
Requests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
packets sent to the server. This does not
include retransmissions.
Tx
Access
Retransmissions
radiusAuthClientExtAcc
essRetransmissions
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
packets retransmitted to the RADIUS
authentication server.
Tx
Pending
Requests
radiusAuthClientExtPen
dingRequests
The number of RADIUS Access-Request
packets destined for the server that have not
yet timed out or received a response. This
variable is incremented when an
Access-Request is sent and decremented
due to receipt of an Access-Accept,
Access-Reject, Access-Challenge, timeout
or retransmission.
Tx
Timeouts
radiusAuthClientExtTimeou
ts
The number of authentication timeouts to
the server. After a timeout, the client may
retry to the same server, send to a different
server, or give up. A retry to the same server
is counted as a retransmit as well as a
timeout. A send to a different server is
counted as a Request as well as a timeout.
Other Info
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
!
!
::T!
Name
RFC4668 Name
Description
State
-
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up
and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and
the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server,
but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server has
temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the dead-time
expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in
parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is
enabled.
Round-Trip
Time
Radius
AuthClientExtRoundTrip
Time
The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent
Access-Reply/Access-Challenge and the Access-Request that matched
it from the RADIUS authentication server. The granularity of this
measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been
round-trip communication with the server yet.
RADIUS Accounting Statistics
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670-RADIUS.Accounting Client MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details.
Packet Counters
RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit counters.
Direction
Name
RFC4670 Name
Description
Rx
Responses
radiusAccClientExtRespons
es
The number of RADIUS packets (valid or
invalid) received from the server.
Rx
Malformed
Responses
radiusAccClientExtMalform
edResponses
The number of malformed RADIUS packets
received from the server. Malformed
packets include packets with an invalid
length. Bad authenticators or unknown
types are not included as malformed access
responses.
Rx
Bad
Authenticators
radiusAcctClientExtBadAut
henticators
The number of RADIUS packets containing
invalid authenticators received from the
!
!
::1!
server.
Rx
Unknown Types
radiusAccClientExtUnknow
nTypes
The number of RADIUS packets of
unknown types that were received from the
server on the accounting port.
Rx
Packets
Dropped
radiusAccClientExtPackets
Dropped
The number of RADIUS packets that were
received from the server on the accounting
port and dropped for some other reason.
Tx
Requests
radiusAccClientExtRequests
The number of RADIUS packets sent to the
server. This does not include
retransmissions.
Tx
Retransmissions
radiusAccClientExtRetrans
missions
The number of RADIUS packets
retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting
server.
Tx
Pending
Requests
radiusAccClientExtPending
Requests
The number of RADIUS packets destined
for the server that have not yet timed out or
received a response. This variable is
incremented when a Request is sent and
decremented due to receipt of a Response,
timeout, or retransmission.
Tx
Timeouts
radiusAccClientExtTimeouts
The number of accounting timeouts to the
server. After a timeout, the client may retry
to the same server, send to a different
server, or give up. A retry to the same
server is counted as a retransmit as well as
a timeout. A send to a different server is
counted as a Request as well as a timeout.
Other Info
This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip time.
Name
RFC4670 Name
Description
State
-
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:
Not Ready:
Disabled: The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet
up and running.
aReady: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and
running, and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting
!
!
::>!
attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this
server, but it did not reply within the configured timeout. The server
has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when the
dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs
is displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when
more than one server is enabled.
Round-Trip
Time
radiusAccClientExtRoun
dTripTime
The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most
recent Response and the Request that matched it from the
RADIUS accounting server. The granularity of this measurement is
100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been round-trip
communication with the server yet.
Buttons
The server select box determines which server is affected by clicking the buttons.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for the selected server. The “Pending Requests” counter will not be cleared
by this operation.
!
!
!
!
:"O!
!
6.1.3.4 Switch / SNMP / RMON
RMON Statistics Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON statistics entries.
The displayed counters:
Data Source
The port ID which wants to be monitored.
Drop
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
Pkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets and multicast packets)
received.
Broad-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multi-cast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
!
!
:"#!
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
Under-size
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Over-size
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.
The number of frames whose size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames whose size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
64
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.
65~127
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 65 to 127 octets in length.
128~255
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 128 to 255 octets in length.
256~511
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 256 to 511 octets in length.
512~1023
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 512 to 1023 octets in length.
1024~1588
The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 1024 to 1588 octets in length.!
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:":!
RMON History Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON history entries.
The displayed fields:
History Index
Indicates the index of History control entry.
Sample Index
Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.
Sample Start
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Drops
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.
Pkts
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets and multicast packets)
received.
Broadcast
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast
!
!
:""!
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRCErrors
The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets.
Undersize
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.
Frag.
The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Jabb.
The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.
Coll.
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.
Utilization
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling
interval, in hundredths of a percent.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
RMON Alarm Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON alarm entries.
The displayed fields:
!
!
:"A!
ID
Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.
Interval
Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.
Variable
Indicates the particular variable to be sampled.
Sample Type
The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the
thresholds. Possible sample types:
Rising Threshold
Rising threshold value.
Rising Index
Rising event index.
Falling Threshold
Falling threshold value.
Falling Index
Falling event index.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:"G!
RMON Event Overview
This page provides an overview of RMON event entries.
The displayed fields:
Event Index
Indicates the index of the event entry.
Log Index
Indicates the index of the log entry.
Log TIme
Indicates Event log time.
Log Description
Indicates the Event description.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:"K!
6.1.4 LACP System Status
6.1.4.1 System Status
This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances.
!
Aggr ID
The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance. For LLAG, the ID is shown as
“isid:aggr-id”; and for GLAGs as “aggr-id.”
Partner System ID
The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.
Partner Key
The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.
Last changed
The time since this aggregation changed.
Local Ports
Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:"T!
6.1.4.2 LACP Port Status
This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports.
Port
The switch port number.
LACP
“Yes” means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. “No” means that LACP is not enabled or that
the port link is down. “Backup” means that the port could not join the aggregation group, but will join if
another port leaves the group. Meanwhile, its LACP status is disabled.
Key
The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.
Aggr ID
The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.
Partner System ID
The partner's System ID (MAC address).
Partner Port
The partner's port number connected to this port.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:"1!
6.1.4.3 LACP statistics
This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports.
Port
The switch port number.
LACP Received
Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.
LACP Transmitted
Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.
Discarded
Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.
Buttons
Auto-refresh: Click this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the counters for all ports.
!
!
:">!
6.1.5 Loop Protection
This page displays the loop protection port status of the switch.
!
Port
The switch port number of the logical port.
Action
The currently configured port action.
Transmit
The currently configured port transmit mode.
Loops
The number of loops detected on this port.
Status
The current loop protection status of the port.
Loop
Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.
Time of Last Loop
The time of the last loop event detected.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:AO!
6.1.6 STP Bridge Status
This page provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances.
6.1.6.1 Bridge Status
The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays the
following information:
MSTI
The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status
Bridge ID
The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.
Root ID
The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.
Root Port
The switch port currently assigned the root port role.
Root Cost
Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge it is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the Port Path Costs
on the least-cost path to the Root Bridge.
Topology Flag
The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance.
Topology Change Last
!
!
:A#!
The time since last Topology Change occurred.
Buttons
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
6.1.6.2 STP Port Status
This page displays the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the switch.
STP port status:
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
CIST Role
The current STP port role of the CIST port. The port role can be one of the following values:
AlternatePort, BackupPort, RootPort, DesignatedPort, Disabled.
CIST State
The current STP port state of the CIST port. The port state can be one of the following values:
Discarding, Learning, Forwarding.
Uptime
The time since the bridge port was last initialized.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:A:!
6.1.6.3 STP Port Statistics
This page displays the STP port statistics counters of bridge ports in the switch.
The STP port statistics counters:
Port
The switch port number of the logical STP port.
MSTP
The number of MSTP Configuration BPDUs received/transmitted on the port.
RSTP
The number of RSTP Configuration BPDUs received/transmitted on the port.
STP
The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDUs received/transmitted on the port.
TCN
The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDUs received/transmitted on the port.
Discarded Unknown
The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDUs received (and discarded) on the port.
Discarded Illegal
The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDUs received (and discarded) on the port.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:A"!
6.1.7 MVR Status
6.1.7.1 Statistics
This page provides MVR Statistics information.
VLAN ID
The Multicast VLAN ID.
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V3 Reports Received
The number of Received V3 Reports.
V2 Leaves Received
The number of Received V2 Leaves.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears all Statistics counters.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:AA!
6.1.7.2 MVR Group Table
Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN
ID, and then by group.
Navigating the MVR Group Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, the default being 20, selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MVR Group Table. The "Start from VLAN" and "Group" input fields allow you to select
the starting point in the MVR Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table
starting from that or the closest next MVR Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will —
upon a Refresh button click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous
refresh with the same start address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the
end is reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button to start over.
MVR!Group!Table!Columns!
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group ID of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Group Table.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
!
:AG!
6.1.8 Monitor / IPMC / IGMP Snooping
6.1.8.1 IGMP Snooping
IGMP Snooping Status
This page provides IGMP Snooping status.
VLAND ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Querier Version
Working Querier Version currently.
Host Version
Working Host Version currently.
Querier Status
Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE."
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
Queries Transmitted
The number of Transmitted Queries.
Queries Received
The number of Received Queries.
!
!
:AK!
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V3 Reports Received
The number of Received V3 Reports.
V2 Leaves Received
The number of Received V2 Leaves.
Router Port
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads toward
the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.
Dynamic denotes the specific port is learned to be a router port.
Both denotes the specific port is configured and learned to be a router port.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears all Statistics counters.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
IGMP Group Information
Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by
VLAN ID, and then by group.
!
!
:AT!
Navigating!the!IGMP!Group!Table!
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, the default being 20, selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the IGMP Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN" and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP
Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the
closest next IGMP Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will — upon a Refresh button
click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start
address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the
end is reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button to start over.
IGMP!Group!Table!Columns!
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Groups
Group address of the group displayed.
Port Members
Ports under this group.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
|<<: Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
!
:A1!
IGMP SFM Information Table
Entries in the IGMP SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The IGMP SFM (Souce-Filtered
Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table
is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port No. Different source addresses belonging
to the same group are treated as single entries.
Navigating the IGMP SFM Information Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table, the default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN" and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP
SFM Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or
the closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match. In addition, the two input fields will — upon a
Refresh button click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh
with the same start address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the
end is reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button to start over.
IGMP SFM Information Table Columns
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Group
Group address of the group displayed.
Port
!
!
:A>!
Switch port number.
Mode
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be
either Include or Exclude.
Source Address
IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering
to 128.
Type
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IGMP SFM Information Table.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
6.1.8.2 MLD Snooping Status
This page provides MLD Snooping status.
VLAND ID
The VLAN ID of the entry.
!
!
:GO!
Querier Version
Working Querier Version currently.
Host Version
Working Host Version currently.
Querier Status
Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE."
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.
Queries Transmitted
The number of Transmitted Queries.
Queries Received
The number of Received Queries.
V1 Reports Received
The number of Received V1 Reports.
V2 Reports Received
The number of Received V2 Reports.
V1 Leaves Received
The number of Received V1 Leaves.
Router Port
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads toward
the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.
Dynamic denotes the specific port is learned to be a router port.
Both denotes the specific port is configured and learned to be a router port.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears all Statistics counters.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
MLD Group Table
!
!
:G#!
Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page. The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN
ID, and then by group.
Navigating the MLD Group Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, the default being 20, selected through
the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MLD Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN" and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD
Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next
closest MLD Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will -— upon a Refresh button click —
assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start
address.
The >> will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the |<< button to start over.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD Group Table.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
!
:G:!
MLD SFM Information Table
Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MLD SFM (Souce-Filtered
Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table
is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port No. Different source addresses belonging to
the same group are treated as single entries.
Navigating the MLD SFM Information Table
Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLD SFM Information table, the default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries
from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN" and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD
SFM Information Table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the
closest next MLD SFM Information Table match. In addition, the two input fields will — upon a button
click — assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start
address.
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is
reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
MLD SFM Information Table Columns
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the group.
Group
Group address of the group displayed.
!
!
:G"!
Port
Switch port number.
Mode
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It can be
either Include or Exclude.
Source Address
IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering
to 128.
Type
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFP Information Table.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
6.1.9 Monitor / LLDP
6.1.9.1 LLDP / Neighbor
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for
each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. The columns hold the following information:
Local Port
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Chassis ID
!
!
:GA!
The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.
Remote Port ID
The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.
System Name
System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.
Port Description
Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.
System Capabilities
System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities:
1. Other
2. Repeater
3. Bridge
4. WAN Access Point
5. Router
6. Telephone
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
9. Reserved
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled, the capability
is followed by (-).
Management Address
Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher-layer entities to assist
discovery by the network management. This could, for instance, hold the neighbor's IP address.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular
intervals.
!
!
:GG!
6.1.9.2 LLDP MED Neighbors
This page provides a status overview of all LLDP-MED neighbors. The displayed table contains a row
for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected. This function applies to VoIP devices which
support LLDP-MED. The columns hold the following information:
Port
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.
Device Type
LLDP-MED Devices are composed of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity Devices and
Endpoint Devices.
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition
LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the IEEE
802-based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity
Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies:
1. LAN Switch / Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater ( included for historical reasons )
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extentions defined by TIA-1057 and can relay
IEEE 802 frames via any method.
!
!
:GK!
LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition
LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge,
and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP-MED framework.
Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into further
Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.
Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the
previous Endpoint Device Class. For example, any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance
as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also supports all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints
(Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device
(Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and
Generic Endpoints (Class I).
LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I)
The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require
the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057 but which do not support IP media or act as an
end-user communication appliance. Such devices may include (but are not limited to) IP
Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any device requiring basic
services as defined in TIA-1057.
Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network policy,
power management and inventory management.
LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II)
The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP
media capabilities but which may or may not be associated with a particular end user. Capabilities
include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class (Class I), and are
extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example product categories expected to
adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media Gateways, Conference Bridges and
Media Servers.
Discovery services defined in this class include media type-specific network layer policy discovery.
LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III)
The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all endpoint products that
act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media. Capabilities include all of the
!
!
:GT!
capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media Endpoint (Class II) classes,
and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices. Example product categories expected
to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) end user communication appliances, such as IP
Phones, PC-based softphones, or other communication appliances that directly support the end user.
Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including ECS / E911
information), embedded L2 switch support and inventory management.
LLDP-MED Capabilities
LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's LLDP-MED capabilities. The possible
capabilities:
1. LLDP-MED capabilities
2. Network Policy
3. Location Identification
4. Extended Power via MDI-PSE
5. Extended Power via MDI-PD
6. Inventory
7. Reserved
Application Type
Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this network policy,
advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The possible application types are shown
below.
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting
interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of
deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
2. Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling
than for the voice media.
3. Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and visitors with
their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest
voice signalling than for the guest voice media.
!
!
:G1!
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such as PCs or
laptops.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar
appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast- or multicast-based video content distribution and other
similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment.
Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling
than for the video media.
Policy
Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the
device. Can be either Defined or Unknown.
Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.
Defined: The network policy is defined.
TAG
TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN. Can
be Tagged or Untagged.
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and, as such, does not include a tag header
as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through
4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using
priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority
level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.
Priority
!
!
:G>!
Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. There are eight priority
levels (0 through 7).
DSCP
DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type
as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contains one of 64 code point values (0 through 63).
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
6.1.9.3 LLDP PoE
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP PoE neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port
on which an LLDP PoE neighbor is detected. The columns hold the following information:
Local Port
The port for this switch on which the LLDP frame was received.
Power Type
Power Type represents whether the device is a Power Sourcing Entity (PSE) or Power Device (PD).
If the Power Type is unknown, it is represented as "Reserved."
Power Source
The Power Source represents the power source being utilized by a PSE or PD device.
If the device is a PSE device, it can either run on its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source.
If it is unknown whether the PSE device is using its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source
it is indicated as "Unknown."
If the device is a PD device, it can either run on its local power supply or it can use the PSE as power
source. It can also use both its local power supply and the PSE.
If it is unknown what power supply the PD device is using it is indicated as "Unknown."
Power Priority
!
!
:KO!
Power Priority represents the priority of the PD device, or the power priority associated with the PSE
type device's port that is sourcing the power. There are three levels of power priority: Critical, High and
Low. If the power priority is unknown it is indicated as "Unknown."
Maximum Power
The Maximum Power Value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts
required by a PD device from a PSE device, or the minimum power a PSE device is capable of
sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration.
The maximum allowed value is 102.3 W. If the device indicates value higher than 102.3 W, it is
represented as "reserved."
Buttons
Auto-refresh : Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3
seconds.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page.
!
6.1.9.4 LLDP EEE
By using EEE,!power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency. This latency occurs
because the circuits EEE turn off to save power or need time to boot up before sending traffic over the
link. This time is called "wakeup time." To achieve minimal latency, devices can use LLDP to exchange
information about their respective tx and rx "wakeup time" as a way to agree upon the minimum
wakeup time they need.
This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP.
LLDP Neighbors EEE Information
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:
!
!
:K#!
Local Port
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
Tx Tw
The link parther's maximum time that transmit path can hold off sending data after deassertion of LPI.
Rx Tw
The link parther's time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for the receiver to
wake from sleep.
Fallback Receive Tw
The link parther's fallback receive Tw.
A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx. Since a receiving
link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings, this provides the transmitter with additional
information that it may use for a more efficient allocation. Systems that do not implement this option
default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx.
Echo Tx Tw
The link partner's Echo Tx Tw value.
The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partner’s reflection (echo) of the remote
link partner’s respective values. When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote
link partner, it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received, registered and
processed its most recent values. For example, if the local link partner receives echoed parameters
that do not match the values in its local MIB, then the local link partner infers that the remote link
partner’s request was based on stale information.
Echo Rx Tw
The link partner's Echo Rx Tw value.
Resolved Tx Tw
The resolved Tx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link parther.
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time" used for this link (based on EEE information
exchanged via LLDP).
Resolved Rx Tw
!
!
:K:!
The resolved Rx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link parther.
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time" used for this link (based on EEE information
exchanged via LLDP).
EEE activated
Shows if the switch and the link partner have agree upon which wakeup times to use.
Red - Switch and link partner have not agreed upon wakeup time.
Green - Switch and link partner have agreed upon wakeup time.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:K"!
!
6.1.9.5 LLDP Statistics
This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic.
Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch, while
local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch.
!
Global Counters
Neighbor entries were last changed on
It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time elapsed
since the last change was detected.
Total Neighbors Entries Added
Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Deleted
Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.
Total Neighbors Entries Dropped
Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.
Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out
Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.
Local!Counters!
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:
!
!
:KA!
Local Port
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.
Tx Frames
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.
Rx Frames
The number of LLDP frames received on the port.
Rx Errors
The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.
Frames Discarded
If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP frame is
counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP
frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained
within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a given port's link is down, when an LLDP
shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.
TLVs Discarded
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for "Type
Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.
TLVs Unrecognized
The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.
Org. Discarded
The number of organizationally received TLVs.
Age-Outs
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid (age-out
time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age-out time, the LLDP information is removed and
the Age-Out counter is incremented.
Buttons!
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
Clear: Clears the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are cleared upon reboot.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
!
!
:KG!
6.1.10 Dynamic MAC Table
Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is
sorted first by VLAND ID, then by MAC address.
Navigating!the MAC Table!
Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, the default being 20, selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest
MAC address found in the MAC Table.
The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the
MAC Table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next
MAC Table match. In addition, the two input fields will — upon a button click — assume the value of the
first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs is used as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached, "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to
start over.
MAC Table Columns
Switch (stack only)
The stack unit where the entry is learned.
Type
Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry.
MAC address
The MAC address of the entry.
VLAN
!
!
:KK!
The VLAN ID of the entry.
Port Members
The ports that are members of the entry.
Buttons!
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input
fields.
Clear: Flushes all dynamic entries.
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table; i.e., the entry with the lowest VLAN
ID and MAC address.
>>: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.
!
6.1.11 VLAN Membership Status
This page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users.
VLAN USER
VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN
memberships and VLAN port configurations, such as PVID and UVID. Currently, the following VLAN
user types are supported:
CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communication between a Supplicant,
Authenticator and an Authentication Server.
MVRP: Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) allows dynamic registration and deregistration of
VLANs on ports on a VLAN-bridged network.
!
!
:KT!
Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP
phones.
MVR: MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN.
Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
MSTP: The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple spanning
trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a
loop-free environment.
Port Members
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.
If a port is included in a VLAN, an image will be displayed.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image will be displayed.
If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden
port, then conflict port will be displayed as .
VLAN Membership
The VLAN Membership Status Page will show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs
configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box). When ALL VLAN
Users are selected, it will show this information for all the VLAN Users, and this is by default. VLAN
membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN
member ports.
Navigating the VLAN Monitor page
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, the default being 20, selected through the
"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the Web page will show the first 20 entries from the
beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the
VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the button
will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match. The last entry
of the currently displayed VLAN entry is used as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached,
"No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.
Buttons!
: Select VLAN Users from this drop-down list.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
!
!
:K1!
VLAN Port Status
This page provides VLAN Port Status.
VLAN!User! !
VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN
memberships and VLAN port configuration, such as PVID and UVID. Currently, the following VLAN
User types are supported:
CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a Supplicant,
Authenticator and an Authentication Server.
MVRP: Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) allows dynamic registration and deregistration of
VLANs on ports on a VLAN-bridged network.
Voice VLAN: Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic, typically originating from IP
phones.
MVR: MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN.
Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
MSTP: The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple spanning
trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a
loop-free environment.
!
!
:K>!
Port
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
PVID
Shows the VLAN identifier for that port. The allowed values are 1 through 4095. The default value is 1.
Port Type
Shows the Port Type. Port type can be any of Unaware, C-port, S-port, Custom S-port.
If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
C-port is Customer Port. S-port is Service port. Custom S-port is S-port with Custom TPID.
Ingress Filtering
Shows the ingress filtering on a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If ingress
filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN, the frame is discarded.
Frame Type
Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects VLAN ingress
processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received on that port are
discarded.
Tx Tag
Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.
UVID
Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior at the egress side.
Conflicts
Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not. When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN
membership or VLAN port configuration, the following conflicts can occur:
Functional Conflicts between features.
Conflicts due to hardware limitation.
Direct conflict between user modules.
!
!
:TO!
Buttons! !
: Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.
Auto-refresh : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.
Refresh: Click to refresh the page immediately.
!
!
:T#!
6.1.13 VCL MAC-Based VLAN Status
This page shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users. Currently,
the following VLAN User types are supported:
CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.
NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a Supplicant,
Authenticator and an Authentication Server.
MAC Address
Indicates the MAC address.
VLAN ID
Indicates the VLAN ID.
Port Members
Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Buttons!
Refresh: Refreshes the displayed table.
!
!
!
:T:!
!
6.1.14 sFlow
This page shows the sFlow Statistics.
Flow Sampling
Packet flow sampling refers to arbitrarily choosing some packets out of a specified number, reading the
first "Max Hdr Size" bytes and exporting the sampled datagram for analysis.
The attributes associated with the flow sampling are sampler type, sampling rate, maximum header
size.
Counter Sampling
Counter sampling performs periodic, time-based sampling or polling of counters associated with an
interface enabled for sFlow.
The attribute associated with counter sampling is polling interval.
sFlow Ports
List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured.
Sampler Type
Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of these types: None, RX, TX, ALL.
!
!
!
6.2 Diagnostic
This section provides some convenient tools for you to do switch diagnostics from a remote site.
6.2.1 Ping
This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.
Type the IP Address, ping length (default = 56 bytes), ping count (default=5) and ping interval (default
=1). Then click "Start" to start pinging a remote host. After you click "Start," 5 ICMP packets are
transmitted, and the sequence number and round-trip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The
page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
ICMP Ping Output Result
PING server 192.168.2.100, 56 bytes of data.
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from 192.168.2.100: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
IP Address
The destination IP Address.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 seconds to 30 seconds.
!
!
:TA!
6.2.2 Ping6
This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.
Type the IPv6 Address, ping length (default = 56 bytes), ping count (default=5) and ping interval
(default =1). Then click "Start" to start ping a remote host. After you click "Start," 5 ICMPv6 packets are
transmitted, and the sequence number and round-trip time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The
page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.
ICMPv6 Ping Output
PING6 server ::10.10.132.20
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms
64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad
You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets:
IP Address
The destination IP Address.
Ping Length
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.
Ping Count
The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.
Ping Interval
The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 seconds to 30 seconds.
!
!
:TG!
!
6.2.3 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostic
This page is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics.
Select the port and then press Start to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all
ports are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When completed, the page refreshes
automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table. Note that
VeriPHY is only accurate for cables lengths of 7-140 meters.
10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY. Therefore, running VeriPHY on a 10
or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete.
Port
The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics.
Cable Status
Port: Port number.
Pair: The status of the cable pair.
The status of the cable pair.
OK - Correctly terminated pair
Open - Open pair
Short - Shorted pair
Short A - Cross-pair short to pair A
Short B - Cross-pair short to pair B
Short C - Cross-pair short to pair C
Short D - Cross-pair short to pair D
Cross A - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair A
Cross B - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair B
Cross C - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair C
!
!
:TK!
Cross D - Abnormal cross-pair coupling with pair D
Length: The length (in meters) of the cable pair.
!
!
!
6.3 Maintenance
The section allows you to maintain the switch, such as Reset Factory Default, Firmware upgrading,
Configuration Save/Restore and Restart the device.
6.3.1 Restart Device
You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.
Yes: Click to restart device.
No: Click to return to the Port State page without restarting.
6.3.2 Factory Defaults
You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained.
The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary.
Yes: Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.
No: Click to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration.
Note: Restoring factory defaults can also be performed by making a physical loopback between port 1
and port 2 within the first minute from switch reboot. In the first minute after boot, “loopback” packets
!
!
:T1!
will be transmitted at port 1. If a “loopback” packet is received at port 2 the switch will do a restore to
default.
6.3.3 Software Upload
6.3.3.1 Firmware Update
This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch.
Browse to the location of a software image, you can see the file name in the right of the Browse
command. Click Upload to start the process.
After the software image is uploaded, a page announces that the firmware update is initiated. After
about a minute, the firmware is updated and the switch restarts.
Warning: While the firmware is being updated, Web access appears to be defunct. The front
LED flashes Green/Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress.
Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function
afterward.
6.3.3.2 Image Select
There are two images saved within the switch.
!
!
:T>!
This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the device,
and allows you to revert to the alternate image.
The Web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images.
Note:
1. In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only the "Active Image" table is shown. In
this case, the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled.
2. If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention),
uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and
activate this.
3. The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases. This does not
constitute an error.
Image Information
Image
The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred) image is!image; the
alternate image is named!image.bk.
Version
The version of the firmware image.
Date
The date where the firmware was produced.
Buttons
Activate Alternate Image: Click to use the alternate image. This button may be disabled depending
on system state.
Cancel: Cancel activating the backup image. Navigates away from this page.
!
!
:1O!
6.3.4 Configuration
You can save/view or load the switch configuration. The configuration file is in XML format with a
hierarchy of tags:
Header tags: <?xml version="1.0"?> and <configuration>. These tags are mandatory and must be
present at the beginning of the file.
Section tags: <platform>, <global> and <switch>. The platform section must be the first section tag and
this section must include the correct platform ID and version. The global section is optional and
includes configuration that is not related to specific switch ports. The switch section is optional and
includes configuration that is related to specific switch ports.
Module tags: <ip>, <mac>, <port> etc. These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the
configuration.
Group tags: <port table>, <vlan table> etc. These tags identify a group of parameters, typically a table.
Parameter tags: <mode>, <entry> etc. These tags identify parameters for the specific section, module
and group. The <entry> tag is used for table entries.
Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values. When saving the configuration from the
switch, the entire configuration, including syntax descriptions, is included in the file. The file may then
be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch.
The example below shows a small configuration file only, including configuration of the MAC address
age time and the learning mode per port. When loading this file, only the included parameters will be
changed. This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic.
< ?xml version="1.0"?>
<configuration>
<platform>
<pid val="3"></pid>
<version val="1"></version>
</platform>
<global>
<mac>
<age val="200"></age>>
</mac>
</global>
<switch sid="1">
<mac>
<entry port="1-24" learn mode="auto"></entry>
</mac>
</switch>
< /configuration>
Save: Click to save the configuration file.
Upload: Click to upload the configuration file.
!
!
Revision History
!
Edition
Date
Modifications
V1.1
15-Nov. 2012
Add Command Line Interface Configuration Guide
in Chapter 5.
Modify the Format of the chapters. Move the
Monitor, Diagnostic and Maintenance to Chapter 6
from Chapter 4.
Add more description for the key features in
Chapter 4, such as IPMC, SSH, HTTPS, RMON,
MSTP, MVR, VLAN, Private VLAN, Access
Management, Loop Protection, sFlow, Firmware
Update, etc.
Remove incorrect information, such as Thermal
Protection, Front LED, LED status, MRP
description, etc. and some incorrect wordings and
figures.